HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 7558 ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENT AT MOUNTAIN AVE & MYRTLE STREET (3)SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENT AT
MOUNTAIN AVE & MYRTLE ST
BID NO. 7558
PURCHASING DIVISION
215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS
OCTOBER 10, 2013 – 3:00 P.M. (OUR CLOCK)
Financial Services
Purchasing Division
215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor
PO Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522
970.221.6775
970.221.6707
fcgov.com/purchasing
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Pages
BID INFORMATION
00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00020-1 - 00020-2
00100 Instruction to Bidders 00100-1 - 00100-9
00300 Bid Form 00300-1 - 00300-3
00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00400-1
00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 - 00410-2
00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00420-1 - 00420-3
00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors 00430-1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
00500 Agreement Forms 00500-1
00510 Notice of Award 00510-0
00520 Agreement 00520-1 - 00520-6
00530 Notice to Proceed 00530-1
00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1
00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 - 00610-2
00615 Payment Bond 00615-1 - 00615-2
00630 Certificate of Insurance 00630-1
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00635-1
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00640-1
00650 Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) 00650-1 - 00650-2
00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 00670-1 - 00670-2
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700 General Conditions 00700-1 - 00700-34
Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2
00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 - 00800-2
00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00900-1
00950 Contract Change Order 00950-1 - 00950-2
00960 Application for Payment 00960-1 - 00960-4
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
Date: September 18, 2013
Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as OWNER), at
the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on October 10, 2013, for the Arthur
Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St; BID NO. 7558. If delivered, they are to
be delivered to 215 North Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If mailed, the
mailing address is P. O. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580.
At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be
publicly opened and read aloud.
The Contract Documents provide for the construction of Bid 7558. The Work consists of the
following:
1. Arthur Ditch Replacement at Mountain Avenue: This work includes removals as
defined in the plans, construction of new bridge (concrete box culvert), earthwork,
stormsewer work, utility coordination, curb and gutter, concrete drives, sidewalk,
concrete pavement, erosion control, and traffic control. The City of Fort Collins will
perform the signing and striping work. Landscaping to be completed by others after
bridge replacement project is complete.
2. Arthur Ditch Replacement at Myrtle Street: This work includes removals as defined in
the plans, construction of new bridge (concrete box culvert), earthwork, stormsewer
work, waterline construction, utility coordination, curb and gutter, concrete drives,
sidewalk, curb ramps, asphalt pavement, erosion control, and traffic control. The City of
Fort Collins will perform the signing and striping work. Landscaping to be completed by
others after bridge replacement project is complete.
All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with the City of Fort Collins,
215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524.
The City encourages all disadvantaged business enterprises to submit bid in response to all
invitations and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, national origin.
A prebid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will be
held at 1:00 PM, on September 26, 2013, in Conference Room 2A at 215 N Mason Street,
Fort Collins.
Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at this
meeting.
The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at:
City of Fort Collins BuySpeed: https://www.fcgov.com/eprocurement
Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents.
The Work is expected to be commenced within the time as required by Section 2.3 of General
Conditions. Substantial Completion of the Work is required as specified in the Agreement.
The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond
guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the
performance of the Contract.
No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of forty-five (45) days after the date fixed for opening
Bids.
The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities and
irregularities therein.
Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid in the
form specified in the Instructions to Bidders.
Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council, shall have
a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property, equipment, material,
supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises directly or indirectly any decision-
making authority concerning such sale or any supervisory authority over the services to be
rendered. This rule also applies to subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift,
gratuity favor, entertainment, kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has
or is seeking to do business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited.
City of Fort Collins
Gerry S. Paul
Director of Purchasing & Risk Management
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.0 DEFINED TERMS
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings
assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits
a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms
"Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to
whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an
award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,
Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including
all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to
Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the
locations identified in the Invitation to Bid.
2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither
OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and 00430
fully executed.
2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the
above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not
confer a license or grant for any other use.
3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the
time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including financial data,
a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of
authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each
Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where
the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the
contract. The Statement of Qualifications shall be prepared on the form provided in
Section 00420.
3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in
determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1)
The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the
services required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide the
service promptly and within the time specified without delay or interference, (3) the
character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder,
(4) the quality of the bidder's performance of previous contracts or services, (5) the
previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws and ordinances relating to
the contract or service, (6) the sufficiency of the financial resources and ability of the
bidder to perform the contract or provide the service, (7) the quality, availability and
adaptability of the materials and services to the particular use required, (8) the
ability of the bidder to provide future maintenance and service for the use of the
subject of the contract, and
(9) any other circumstances which will affect the bidder's performance of the contract.
3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former Work so that no
just claims are pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder
who is engaged on any other Work which would impair his ability to perform or
finance this Work.
3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with the City
or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City.
4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local
conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the
Work, (c) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the
Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract
Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the
Contract Documents.
4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Subsurface
and Physical Conditions SC-4.2.
4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder
that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without
exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by
the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract
Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to
indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and
furnishing of the Work.
5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA.
5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be
submitted in writing to the Engineer and the OWNER. Interpretation or clarifications
considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued only by
Addenda. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of
the Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda
will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal
effect.
5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project should be directed to the
Engineer. Questions regarding submittal of bids should be directed to the City of
Fort Collins' Purchasing Division.
5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed
advisable by OWNER or Engineer.
5.4. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as
having received the Bidding documents.
6.0 BID SECURITY
6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in the
amount stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the form of a
certified or bank cashier's check payable to OWNER or a Bid Bond on the form
enclosed herewith. The Bid Bond must be executed by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Conditions for surety bonds.
6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has
executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon
Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required contract security within 15 days of the Notice of
Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder
will be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have
reasonable chance receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier
of the seventh day after the effective date of the Agreement or the thirty-first day
after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be
returned. Bid Security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within
seven days after the Bid opening.
7.0 CONTRACT TIME.
The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to be substantially
complete and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the Contract Times) are set
forth in the Agreement.
8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.
Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement.
9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described on
the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible
substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated on the Drawings or specified in
the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be
furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to Engineer, application for such
acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the "effective date of the
Agreement". The procedure for submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and
consideration by Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which may be
supplemented in the General Requirements.
10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal
subcontractors he proposes to use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430 contained
within these Documents.
10.2. If OWNER or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to any
proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given, request
the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an
increase in Bid price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to make any
substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest responsive and
responsible Bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors.
Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or organization listed and to whom
OWNER or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the
Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to
revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as
provided in the General Conditions.
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier or
other persons or organizations against whom he has reasonable objection. The
use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by OWNER prior to the
Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work.
11.0 BID FORM.
11.1. A copy of the Bid Form is bound in the Contract Documents which may be retained
by the Bidder. A separate unbound copy is enclosed for submission with the Bid.
11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the form must
be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take precedence.
Unit prices shall govern over extensions of sums.
11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a
vice-president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to
sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an
assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the corporate name.
11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a
partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the
partnership must be shown below the signature.
11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by
an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company
interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form.
11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers
of which must be filled in on the Bid Form).
11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations,
or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by
the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so
initialed.
11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be
shown.
12.0 BID PRICING.
Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules.
13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS.
13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and
shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project title, Bid
No., and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security,
Bid Form, Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule of
Subcontractors as required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail or
other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate
envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for
receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by
addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned
unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location
designated for receipt of Bids.
13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive
consideration.
13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will
not be accepted from one firm or association.
14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS.
14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in
a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are
to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
14.2. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an authorized
representative provided he can prove his identity and authority at any time prior to
the opening of Bids.
14.3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of
Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to
Bidders.
15.0 OPENINGS OF BIDS.
Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly as
indicated in the Invitation to Bid. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and major
alternates (if any) will be made available after the opening of Bids.
16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE.
All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid Opening, but
OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to
that date.
17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT.
17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all
informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate contract
terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming,
nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves the right to
reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best
interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is
not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to
meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER.
Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct
sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether
or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit
prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of
Award.
17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the
Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and
organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may consider
the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees
of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work
when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist
in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and
financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other
persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and
responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the
award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the
evaluated lowest base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the
lowest Bid total for the Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for
sum of all schedules. Only one contract will be awarded.
17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice
of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening.
17.0 CONTRACT SECURITY.
The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's
requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers
the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required
Contract Security.
18.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT.
When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied
by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written
Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall
sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached
documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter,
OWNER hall deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is
to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.
19.0 TAXES.
OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the
Contract Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary Conditions.
20.0 RETAINAGE.
Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement.
21.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS.
Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the
Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions is
available for review in the Purchasing and Risk Management Division or the City Clerk's
office.
A. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that
suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement to certify
that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn hazardous waste as
a fuel.
22.0 COLLUSIVE OR SHAM BIDS.
Any Bid deemed by the City in its sole discretion to be a collusive or sham Bid will be
rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of this Bid
assures that such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid.
23.0 BID RESULTS.
For information regarding results for individual Bids send a self-addressed, self-stamped
envelope and a Bid tally will be mailed to you. Bid results will be posted in the
Purchasing office seven (7) days after the Bid Opening.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
PROJECT: 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St
Place:
Date:
1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to
all conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company,
Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the State of
Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract
Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid
Schedule or Bid Schedules.
2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in
good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or persons Bidding for
the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and
conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, the Agreement, the
detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which
have been examined by the undersigned.
3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in the sum
of
($ ) in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and Instructions to
Bidders.
4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance Bond and
a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days
from the date when the written notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at
the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate surety with which
the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified performance and payment Bonds is as
follows: .
5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their
individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or
appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items
listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list.
6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid
Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents.
7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. through
.
8. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid)
CONTRACT
ITEM NO.
CONTRACT ITEM UNIT
PROJECT
TOTALS
COST PER ITEM TOTAL
201 CLEARING & GRUBBING LS
1
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF TREE EA
1
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF INLET EA
5
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF MANHOLE EA
1
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF PIPE LF
139
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF SIDEWALK SY
182
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF FIRE HYDRANT EA
1
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF FENCE LF
285
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF CURB LF
129
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER LF
844
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE PAVEMENT SY
405
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE DRIVEWAY SY
164
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF ASPHALT MAT SY
2295
$ ‐
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE BOX CULVERT EA
2
$ ‐
203 EXCAVATION CY
253
$ ‐
203 MUCK EXCAVATION CY
351
$ ‐
203 POTHOLING LS
1
$ ‐
206 SHORING (AREA 1) LS
1
206 FILTER MATERIAL (CLASS B) CY
109
$ ‐
206 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (CLASS 1) CY
558
$ ‐
206 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (FLOWFILL) CY
40
$ ‐
208 STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION (BLOCK & GRAVEL) EA
7
$ ‐
208 VEHICLE TRACKING PAD EA
2
$ ‐
208 CONCRETE WASHOUT STRUCTURE EA
2
$ ‐
208 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF SEDIMENT LS
1
$ ‐
208 EROSION CONTROL SUPERVISOR LS
1
$ ‐
210 ADJUST MANHOLE EA
2
$ ‐
210 ADJUST WATER METER EA
1
$ ‐
210 RELOCATE WATER METER EA
1
$ ‐
210 ADJUST WSB EA
1
$ ‐
210 RELOCATE WSB EA
1
$ ‐
212 TREE RETENTION & PROTECTION LS
1
$ ‐
304 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (CLASS 6) TON
850
$ ‐
403 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING S) (75) (PG 58‐28) TON
185
$ ‐
403 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING SG) (75) (PG 58‐28) TON
371
$ ‐
412 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (8 INCH) SY
335
$ ‐
412 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY (6 INCH) SY
215
$ ‐
420 GEOSYNTHETIC PAVEMENT INTERLAYER SY
63
$ ‐
603 10 INCH SDR 35 PVC PIPE LF
2
$ ‐
603 18 INCH SDR 35 PIPE LF
136
$ ‐
604 MANHOLE (48 INCH DIAMETER) EA
1
$ ‐
604 MANHOLE (72 INCH DIAMETER) EA
1
$ ‐
604 MANHOLE RING AND COVER EA
4
$ ‐
604 INLET TYPE 13 (SINGLE) EA
5
$ ‐
607 FENCE (SPECIAL) LF
116
$ ‐
608 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (6 INCH) SY
329
$ ‐
608 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (4 INCH REINFORCED) SY
21
$ ‐
608 CONCRETE CURB RAMP SY
55
$ ‐
608 DETECTABLE WARNING SF
25
$ ‐
609 BARRIER CURB LF
168
$ ‐
609 CURB AND GUTTER LF
869
$ ‐
609 GUTTER TYPE 2 (3 FOOT) LF
21
$ ‐
619 8 INCH PVC PIPE (C900) LF
426
$ ‐
619 16 INCH STEEL CASING LF
40
$ ‐
619 24 INCH STEEL CASING LF
52
$ ‐
619 CONNECT TO EXISTING 6 INCH PVC LS
1
$ ‐
619 CONNECT TO EXISTING 8 INCH PVC LS
1
$ ‐
619 WATER SERVICES EA
8
$ ‐
619 FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY EA
1
$ ‐
619 ABANDON VALVE EA
1
$ ‐
619 8 INCH WATERLINE LOWERING EA
2
$ ‐
626 MOBILIZATION LS
1
$ ‐
630 TRAFFIC CONTROL LS
1
$ ‐
630 VARIABLE MESSAGE BOARDS DAY
20
$ ‐
630 FLAGGING (SPECIAL) HOUR
240
$ ‐
$ ‐
IN WORDS:
TOTAL BASE BID
9. PRICES
The foregoing prices shall include all labor, materials, transportation, shoring, removal,
dewatering, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the complete Work in place of the
several kinds called for.
Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to delete items in the Bid or change
quantities at his sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so
long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total
Agreement Price.
RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED:
CONTRACTOR
BY:
Printed Date
Title
License Number (If Applicable)
(Seal - if Bid is by corporation)
Attest:
Address
Telephone
Email
SECTION 00400
SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS
00410 Bid Bond
00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications
00430 Schedule of Subcontractors
SECTION 00410
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned
as Principal, and as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins,
Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $ for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we
hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors, and assigns.
THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the City
of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a
Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, .
NOW THEREFORE,
(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or
(b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the
form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and
shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for payment of all
persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all
other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims
hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein
stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety
and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which
the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such
extension.
Surety Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the State of
Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals
this day of , 20__, and such of them as are corporations have caused
their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper
officers, the day and year first set forth above.
PRINCIPAL SURETY
Name:
Address:
By: By:
Title: Title:
ATTEST:
By:
(SEAL) (SEAL)
SECTION 00420
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This
statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached
sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires.
1. Name of Bidder:
2. Permanent main office address:
3. When organized:
4. If a corporation, where incorporated:
5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present
firm or trade name?
6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and the
appropriate anticipated dates of completion.)
7. General character of Work performed by your company:
8. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you?
If so, where and why?
9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract?
If so, where and why?
10. Are you debarred by any government agency?
If yes list agency name.
11. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the
approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type of
construction.
12. List your major equipment available for this contract.
13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project:
14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including
officers:
15. Credit available: $
16. Bank Reference:
17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other
information that may be required by the OWNER?
18. Are you licensed as a General Contractor?
If yes, in what city, county and state?
What class, license and numbers?
19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract?
If yes, what percent of total contract?
And to whom?
20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time?
IF yes, DETAIL
21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL
What company?
22. What are your company's bonding limitations?
23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to
furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising
this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications.
Dated at ________________ this ______ day of __________________, 20__.
Company:
By: Printed:
Title:
State of
County of
being duly sworn deposes and says that he
is of
(Name) (Organization)
and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true
and correct.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ day of____________, 20__.
(Seal)
Notary Public
My commission expires: .
SECTION 00430
SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS
List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over
15% of the contract.
ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT FORMS
00510 Notice of Award
00520 Agreement
00530 Notice to Proceed
SECTION 00510
NOTICE OF AWARD
DATE: [Date]
TO: [Contractor]
PROJECT: 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER")
You are hereby notified that your Bid dated [Contractor's Bid Date] for the above project has
been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an
Agreement for 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St.
The Price of your Agreement is ($ ).
Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany
this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise
made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of
this Notice of Award, that is by [Date].
1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement
including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your
signature on the cover of the page.
2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as
specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and
Supplementary Conditions.
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider
your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited.
Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1)
fully-signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
Gerry S. Paul
Director of Purchasing & Risk Management
SECTION 00520
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year] and shall be
effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City.
The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and
[Contractor] (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR)
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth,
agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1. WORK
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may
be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 7558 Arthur Ditch
CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St and is generally described in
Section 01010.
ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER
The Project has been designed by AECOM. The City of Fort Collins Engineering
Department, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties
and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER
in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES
3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete within One Hundred Fifty(150)
calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as
provided in the General Conditions and completed and ready for Final
Payment and Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions within
Fifteen (15) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times
commence to run.
Work at Mountain Avenue cannot begin until November 1, 2013.
3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is
of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss
if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1.
above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of
the General Conditions.
They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in
proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work
is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,
OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated damages for delay
(but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set
forth hereafter.
1) Substantial Completion:
One Thousand Eight Hundred Dollars ($1,800) for each calendar day or
fraction thereof that expires after the One Hundred Fifty (150) calendar
day period for Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is
Substantially Complete.
2) Final Acceptance:
After Substantial Completion, Five Hundred Dollars ($500) for each
calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the Fifteen (15)
calendar day period for Final Payment and Acceptance until the Work is
ready for Final Payment and Acceptance.
ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE
4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows:
Dollars ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and
incorporated herein by this reference.
ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article
14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by
ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions.
5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on
account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application
for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during
construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis
of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values
established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of
Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in
accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work.
5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as
contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each
case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such
amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in
accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole
discretion of Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines
that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to
OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the
character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will
be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the
remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an
amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and
equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and
accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in
paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the
application Section 00520 Page 3 for payment.
5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount
sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to
95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall
determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of
the General Conditions or as provided by law.
5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in
accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall
pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER
as provided in said paragraph 14.13.
ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes
the following representations:
6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the
Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and
Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of the Work.
6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of
subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of
the General Conditions.
6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes
responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to
supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the
subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise
may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of
the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in
accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents,
including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General
Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required
by CONTRACTOR for such purposes.
6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown
or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes
responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies
or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are
or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the
Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance
with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including
specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions.
6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations,
examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.
6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors
or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the
written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the
definition of “Contract Documents” in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions,
and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are
incorporated herein by this reference.
7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related
actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract
Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are
not limited to, the following:
7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion
7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance
7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases
7.2.4 Consent of Surety
7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate
7.2.6 Application for Payment
7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows:
1 COVER SHEET
2-3 COMBINED SUMMARY OF QUANTITIES
MOUNTAIN AVENUE IMPROVEMENTS
4 TITLE SHEET
5 STANDARD PLANS LIST
6 GENERAL NOTES
7 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
8 TYPICAL SECTIONS
9-10 TABULATIONS
11 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
12 ROADWAY PLAN
13 PROFILE PLAN
14 GRADING PLAN
15-18 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
19 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
20-25 STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION
26-27 TRAFFIC CONTROL INFO
28 POTHOLE DATA
MYRTLE STREET IMPROVEMENTS
29 TITLE SHEET
30 STANDARD PLANS LIST
31 GENERAL NOTES
32-33 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
34 TYPICAL SECTIONS
35-37 TABULATIONS
38-39 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
40-41 ROADWAY PLAN
42-43 ROADWAY PROFILE
44-45 GUTTER PROFILES
46-47 GRADING PLAN
48 STORM INLET RECONSTRUCTION DETAILS
49-52 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
53-54 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
55-58 STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION
559-60 TRAFFIC CONTROL INFO
61 POTHOLE DATA
62-64 WATER UTILITIES INFO
The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and
dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated.
7.4. Addenda Numbers to , inclusive.
7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other
documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract
Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions.
7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated
by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be
amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6
of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS
8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General
Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the
Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the
written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not
without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due
may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the
effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically
stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no
assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or
responsibility under the Contract Document.
8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors,
assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners,
successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants,
Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document.
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR]
By: By:
GERRY S. PAUL
DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING
AND RISK MANAGEMENT
PRINTED
Date: Title:
Date:
Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL)
City Clerk
Address for giving notices:
P. O. Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522 Attest:
Approved as to Form Address for giving notices:
Assistant City Attorney
License No.:
SECTION 00530
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Description of Work: 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St
To: [Contractor]
This notice is to advise you:
That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the
CONTRACTOR and the OWNER.
That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received
by the OWNER.
That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents.
Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and
directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as
required by the Agreement.
Dated this day of , 20 .
The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20_ and
, 20__, respectively.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
Title:
ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of
, 20__.
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
By:
Title:
SECTION 00600
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
00610 Performance Bond
00615 Payment Bond
00630 Certificate of Insurance
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance
00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR)
00660 Consent of Surety
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate
SECTION 00610
PERFORMANCE BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300
Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as
the "OWNER", in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States,
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month], 20[Year], a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
Project, 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the
undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the
original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or
without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall
satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and
save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure
to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER
may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in
full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of
which shall be deemed an original, this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is
Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00615
PAYMENT BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins,
300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to
as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United
States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors
and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month], 20[Year], a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
Project, 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors,
and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work
provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including
all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools,
consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance
premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or
otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts,
each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is
Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00630
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance.
SECTION 00635
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER)
DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC
Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St
PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado
INCLUDE:
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
CONTRACT DATE: [Date]
The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of
the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or specified part of the
project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date.
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be
exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to
complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated.
CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and
will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on
. The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under
the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By:
OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
REMARKS:
SECTION 00640
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
, 20__
TO: [Contractor]
Gentlemen:
You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of
Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by [Contractor] for the City of Fort
Collins project, 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St.
A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final
Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated
[Contract Date].
In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees
will continue for the specified time from the following date:____________ _, 20__.
Sincerely,
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Title:
SECTION 00650
LIEN WAIVER RELEASE
(CONTRACTOR)
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER)
FROM: [Contractor] (CONTRACTOR)
PROJECT: 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St
1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the
OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the
CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement,
alteration, addition or repair of the above described project.
2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt
and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives
all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims
(40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights
which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any
work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction,
design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against
the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the
possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the
buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project.
3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or
performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of
the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents,
employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various
Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further
affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or
possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the
OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its
officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project.
4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any,
and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the
CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns
against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns
arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys
fees, incurred as a result of such claims.
5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and
adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release
pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and
may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and
material bonds for the project.
Signed this day of , 20__.
CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR]
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Secretary
STATE OF COLORADO )
)ss.
COUNTY OF LARIMER )
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20__,
by .
Witness my hand and official seal.
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
SECTION 00660
CONSENT OF SURETY
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER")
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
PROJECT: 7558 Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St
CONTRACT DATE: [Date]
In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
as indicated above, for .
(Surety)
on bond of
hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to
the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the
OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this
day of , 20____ .
(Surety Company)
By:
ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact.
SECTION 00670
APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
Special Notice
Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following changes
in procedure:
The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to subcontractors. Only
prime contractors will receive a Contractor’s Exemption Certificate on exempt projects.
Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each subcontractor
involved in the project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor’s name and address and
signing it.
The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all
Certificates that the prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the prime
contractor’s place of business for a minimum of three years and be available for inspection in
the event of an audit.
Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it for any
applications submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent number. For
instance, if you were assigned 89-12345-0001, every application submitted thereafter should
contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeeding numbers will be issued by the
Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you believe to be the next in sequence as this
may delay processing of your application.
SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Conditions of the Contract
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins
modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below.
SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability
A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8.
The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the
General Conditions listed below are as follows:
5.4.1 and 5.4.2
Coverage A - Statutory Limits
Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000
5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of
$1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage
for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the
Owner.
5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have
limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL).
5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product
liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL).
SECTION 00900
ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT
00950 Contract Change Order
00960 Application for Payment
SECTION 00950
CHANGE ORDER NO.
PROJECT TITLE: Arthur Ditch CBC Replacement at Mountain Ave & Myrtle St
CONTRACTOR: [Contractor]
PROJECT NUMBER: 7558
DESCRIPTION:
1. Reason for change:
2. Description of Change:
3. Change in Contract Cost:
4. Change in Contract Time:
ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ .00
TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER %
TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT %
ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ .00
(Assuming all change orders approved)
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Contractor's Representative
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Project Manager
REVIEWED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
Purchasing Agent over $30,000
cc: City Clerk Contractor Engineer
Project File Architect Purchasing
Section 00960
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 4
OWNER: City of Fort Collins PROJECT: APPLICATION NUMBER:
APPLICATION DATE:
PERIOD BEGINNING:
ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: PERIOD ENDING:
PROJECT NUMBER:
CHANGE ORDERS Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with Contract
NUMBER DATE AMOUNT
The present status of the account for this Contract is as
follows:
1
2 Original Contract Amount:
3 Net Change by Change Order:
Current contract Amount: $0.00
Total Completed and Stored to Date:
Less Previous Applications:
Amount Due this Application - Before Retainage: $0.00
Less Retainage:
Net Change by Change Order $0.00 AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION: $0.00
CERTIFICATION:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with
the Work have been satisfied as required in Paragraph 14.3. of the General Conditions of the Contract.
The above Amount Due This Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is recommended by the ENGINEER.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER.
Date: By:
CONTRACT AMOUNTS
APPLICATION FOR
PAYMENT PAGE 2 OF 4
Work
Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period
To
Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
CHANGE ORDERS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 3 OF 4
Work
Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period
To
Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS CHANGE
ORDERS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
PROJECT TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
STORED MATERIALS
SUMMARY PAGE 4 OF 4
On Hand Received Installed On Hand
Item Invoice Previous This This This
Number Number Description Application Period Period Application
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
1
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Arthur Ditch CBC Replacements
The 2011 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction controls construction of this project. The
following special provisions supplement or modify the Standard Specifications and take precedence over the
Standard Specifications and plans.
PROJECT SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Page
Index Pages (9/9/2013) 1 –4
Notice to Bidders (9/9/2013) 5
Commencement and Completion of Work (9/9/2013) 6
Revision of Section 101 - Definition of Terms (9/9/2013) 7
Revision of Section 102 - Project Plans and Other Data (9/9/2013) 8
Revision of Section 105 - Dispute Resolution (9/9/2013) 9
Revision of Section 107 - Performance of Safety Critical Work (9/9/2013) 10-12
Revision of Section 107 - Interruption of Irrigation Water Flow (9/9/2013) 13
Revision of Section 107 - Protection of Existing Vegetation (9/9/2013) 14
Revision of Section 108 - Prosecution and Progress (9/9/2013) 15-20
Revision of Section 201 - Clearing and Grubbing (9/9/2013) 21
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Fire Hydrant (9/9/2013) 22
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Asphalt Mat (9/9/2013) 23
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Concrete Box Culvert (9/9/2013) 24
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Portions of Present Structures (9/9/2013) 25
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Fence (9/9/2013) 26
Revision of Section 202 - Removal of Concrete Pavement (9/9/2013) 27
Revision of Section 206 - Shoring (9/9/2013) 28
Revision of Section 206 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures, Culverts
and Pipes (9/9/2013) 29
Revision of Section 208 - Erosion Control (9/9/2013) 30
Revision of Section 209 - Watering and Dust Palliatives (9/9/2013) 31
Revision of Section 212 - Tree Retention and Protection (9/9/2013) 32-37
Revision of Section 412 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (9/9/2013) 38
Revision of Section 420 - Geosynthetics (9/9/2013) 39
Revision of Section 603 - Culverts and Sewers (9/9/2013) 40
Revision of Section 607 – Fence (Special) (9/9/2013) 41
Revision of Section 609 - Curb (9/9/2013) 42
Revision of Section 619 – Waterline Lowering and Water Service Lowering (9/9/2013) 43
Revision of Section 619 –Water Service (9/9/2013) 44
Revision of Section 619 –Fire Hydrant Assembly (9/9/2013) 45
Revision of Section 619 –8 Inch PVC (C900)(Waterline) (9/9/2013) 46
Revision of Section 619 –Cooper Pipe (9/9/2013) 47
Revision of Section 619 – Plug Existing 4” Pipe (9/9/2013) 48
Revision of Section 619 – Connect to Existing 8” PVC Pipe (9/9/2013) 49
Revision of Section 619 – Connect to Existing 6” PVC Pipe (9/9/2013) 50
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
2
2
PROJECT SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Revision of Section 619 – Abandon Valve (9/9/2013) 51
Revision of Section 630 - Construction Zone Traffic Control (9/9/2013) 52
Utilities (9/9/2013) 53
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
3
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Arthur Ditch CBC Replacements
STANDARD SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Date No. of Pages
Revision of Section 103 – Colorado Resident Bid Preference (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 105 – Disputes and Claims for Contract Adjustments (January 31, 2013) 31
Revision of Section 105 – Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement Smoothness (April 26, 2012) 7
Revision of Section 105 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Smoothness (April 26, 2012) 1
Revision of Section 105 – Violation of Working Time Limitation (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Sections 105 and 106 – Conformity to the Contract of Hot Mix Asphalt (February 3, 2011) 7
(Less than 5000 Tons)
Revision of Sections 105, 106, 412, 601 and 709–Conformity to the Contract of Portland (May 2, 2013) 15
Cement Concrete Pavement, Dowel Bars and Tie Bars for Joints
Revision of Section 106 – Certificates of Compliance and Certified Test Reports (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 107 – Project Payrolls (May 2, 2013) 1
Revision of Section 107 - Responsibility for Damage Claims, (February 3, 2011) 1
Insurance Types, and Coverage Limits
Revision of Sections 107 and 208 – Water Quality Control, Under One
Acre of Disturbance (May 2, 2013) 3
Revision of Section 108 - Critical Path Method (August 19, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 108 – Liquidated Damages (May 2, 2013) 1
Revision of Section 108 – Subletting of Contract (January 31, 2013) 1
Revision of Section 109 – Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment (April 5, 2013) 2
(Asphalt Cement Included in the Work)
Revision of Section 109 - Compensation for Compensable Delays (May 5, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 109 – Fuel Cost Adjustment (February 3, 2011) 2
Revision of Section 109 – Measurement of Quantities (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 109 – Measurement of Water (January 06, 2012) 1
Revision of Section 109 – Prompt Payment (January 31, 2013) 1
Revision of Sections 203, 206, 304 and 613 - Compaction (July 19, 2012) 2
Revision of Sections 206 and 601 – Backfilling Structures that Support (July 29, 2011) 1
Lateral Earth Pressures
Revision of Section 208 – Aggregate Bag (January 31, 2013) 1
Revision of Section 208 – Erosion Log (January 31, 2013) 1
Revision of Section 250 – Environmental, Health and Safety Management (July 19, 2012) 1
Revision of Section 401 – Compaction of Hot Mix Asphalt (April 26, 2012) 1
Revision of Section 401 – Compaction Pavement Test Section (CTS) (July 19, 2012) 1
Revision of Section 401 – Temperature Segregation (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Sections 412 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Finishing (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Sections 412, 601, and 711 - Liquid Membrane-Forming (May 5, 2011) 1
Compounds for Curing Concrete
Revision of Section 601 – Concrete Batching (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 601 – Concrete Finishing (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 601 – Concrete Form and Falsework Removal (July 28, 2011) 2
Revision of Section 601 – Concrete Slump Acceptance (July 29, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 627 and 708 – Pavement Marking Paint (January 31, 2013) 2
Revision of Section 630 – Construction Zone Traffic Control (February 17, 2012) 1
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
4
Revision of Section 630 – Retroreflective Sign Sheeting (With Type VI Sheeting) (February 3, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 630 – Signs and Barricades (January 31, 2013) 1
Revision of Section 703 – Aggregate for Hot Mix Asphalt (November 1, 2012) 2
Revision of Section 703 – Concrete Aggregate (July 28, 2011) 1
Revision of Section 712 – Water for Mixing or Curing Concrete (February 3, 2011) 1
Affirmative Action Requirements – Equal Employment Opportunity (February 3, 2011) 10
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
5
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Pursuant to subsections 102.04 and 102.05, it is recommended that bidders on this project review the work site
and plan details with an authorized City representative. Prospective bidders shall contact one of the following
listed authorized City Representatives at least 12 hours in advance of the time they wish to review the project.
Project Manager: Kyle Lambrecht, PE
Engineering Department
City of Fort Collins
281 North College Avenue
Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580
Office Phone: 970-221-6566
Fax: 970-221-6378
klambrecht@fcgov.com
Senior Buyer: John Stephen
Purchasing Department
City of Fort Collins
Fort Collins, CO 80522
Office Phone: 970-221-6777
Fax: 970-221-6707
jstephen@fcgov.com
The above referenced individual are the only representative of the City with authority to provide any information,
clarification, or interpretation regarding the plans, specifications, and any other contract documents or
requirements.
Question received from bidders along with City responses will be posted as an addendum on line at the City of
Fort Collins Buy Speed Webpage, www.fcgov.com/eprocurement as they become available.
All questions shall be directed to the City contacts listed above no later than 7:00 am one week prior to the bid
opening. Questions and answers shall be used for reference only and shall not be considered part of the Contract.
Where references is made in the plans and specifications to Owner, Department, Chief Engineer, Resident
Engineer, Project Engineer, Engineer, and Inspection and Testing Agency it is understood to mean the City of
Fort Collins, Colorado, representative.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
6
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION OF WORK
The Contractor shall commence work under the Contract by the City in the “Notice to Proceed”. The Contractor
shall complete all work within 150 calendar days in accordance with the “Notice to Proceed”. Estimated
Substantial Completion is March 27, 2014.
The Contractor will be allowed 90 day individual street closures at both locations once requested. At the end of
this time frame, the roadway must be reopened. Provisions on how to temporarily open the roadway must be
provided and approved by the City if final riding surfaces are not constructed by the end of the 90 day closures.
To provide the most flexibility to construct the project, the Contractor is responsible to determine construction
phasing and when to request the street closures. The City requests a minimum of two weeks’ notice prior to the
requested closure date.
Salient features to be shown on the Contractor’s Progress Schedule are:
1) Erosion Control
2) Construction Traffic Control
3) Removals
4) Structure Excavation and Backfill
5) Utilities Relocation
6) Storm Drain
7) Box Culvert
8) Waterproofing Barrier
9) Concrete Pavement
10) Asphalt Paving
11) Sidewalks
12) Curb
13) Clean Up and Punch List
Section 108 of the supplemental specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 108.03 shall include the following:
The Contractor’s Progress Schedule shall be a CPM Schedule. Full street closures must be shown on the
schedule.
Work cannot commence until ditch is no longer running water. This anticipated date is October 15, 2013. All
work which affects ditch must be completed by April 15, 2014.
Work on Mountain Avenue cannot commence until November 1, 2013.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
7
REVISION OF SECTION 101
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Technical Specifications related to construction materials and methods for the Work embraced under this Contract
shall consist of the “Colorado Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction” dated 2011, along with the Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards and the City of Fort
Collins Utility Standards. If there is a conflict apparent between the two, the more stringent specification shall be
used.
Certain terms utilized in the Specifications referred to in the paragraph above shall be interpreted to have different
meanings within the scope of the Contract. A summary of redefinitions follows:
a. 101.28 Department. City of Fort Collins Engineering Department, Colorado
b. 101.29 Engineer. The Construction Engineer for the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, or designated
representative.
c. 101.39 Laboratory. City of Fort Collins, Colorado, or their designated representative.
d. 101.51 Project Engineer. The Project Manager, City of Fort Collins, Colorado or designated representative.
e. 101.76 State. City of Fort Collins, Colorado (where applicable)
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
8
REVISION OF SECTION 102
PROJECT PLANS AND OTHER DATA
Section 102 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 102.05 shall include the following:
Contract documents and supporting information will be available for review until the date set for opening of bids
at the following locations:
1. Online at the City of Fort Collins Buy Speed Webpage, www.fcgov.com/eprocurement
2. City of Fort Collins Purchasing Department, 215 N Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado,
80524
The following information is available:
Geotechnical Report
City’s Survey
Electronic copy of the Bid Tab
After the proposal have been opened, the low responsible bidder may obtain from the City, at no cost: 2 sets of 11
x 17 plans and special provisions; and if available for the project, one set of full-size cross sections, one set of
full-size major structure plan sheets, and one set of compute output data. If the low bidder has not picked up the
plans and other available data by 4:30 pm on the second Friday after bid opening, they will be sent to the Project
Engineer in charge of the project. Additional sets of plans and other available data may be purchased on a cash
sale basis from the City at current reproduction prices. Subcontractors and suppliers may obtain plans and other
data from the successful bidder or they may purchase copies on cash sale basis from the City at current
reproduction prices.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
9
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 105.22 shall be revised as follows:
The Colorado Department of Transportation will not participate in the resolution process for any claims
filed by the Contractor.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
10
REVISION OF SECTION 107
PERFORMANCE OF SAFETY CRITICAL WORK
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised as follows:
Add subsection 107.061 immediately following subsection 107.06 as follows:
107.061 Performance of Safety Critical Work. The following work elements are considered safety critical work
for this project:
(1) Removal of the Arthur Ditch concrete box culverts at Mountain Avenue and Myrtle Streets.
(2) Temporary support and replacement for the Fort Collins Municipal Railway tracks.
(3) Temporary support of existing tree at SW corner of the replacement at Myrtle Street.
(4) Temporary works: falsework, shoring that exceeds 5 feet in height, cofferdams, and temporary bridges
(5) Work requiring the use of cranes or other heavy lifting equipment to set structures. Also when
construction materials are being lifted that may fall onto active traffic lanes.
(6) Blasting
(7) Excavation and embankment adjacent to the roadway, especially if it requires shoring
(8) Work operations such as jack hammering which may create vibration.
The Contractor shall submit, for record purposes only, an initial detailed construction plan that addresses safe
construction of each of the safety critical elements. When the specifications already require an erection plan, or a
removal of portion of bridge plan, it shall be included as a part of this plan. The detailed construction plan shall be
submitted two weeks prior to the safety critical element conference described below. The construction plan shall
be stamped “Approved for Construction” and signed by the Contractor. The construction plan will not be
approved by the Engineer.
The Construction Plan shall include the following:
(1) Safety Critical Element for which the plan is being prepared and submitted.
(2) Contractor or subcontractor responsible for the plan preparation and the work.
(3) Schedule, procedures, equipment, and sequence of operations, that comply with the working hour
limitations
(4) Temporary works required: falsework, bracing, shoring, etc.
(5) Additional actions that will be taken to ensure that the work will be performed safely.
(6) Names and qualifications of workers who will be in responsible charge of the work:
A. Years of experience performing similar work
B. Training taken in performing similar work
C. Certifications earned in performing similar work
(7) Names and qualifications of workers operating cranes or other lifting equipment
A. Years of experience performing similar work
B. Training taken in performing similar work
C. Certifications earned in performing similar work
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
11
2
REVISION OF SECTION 107
PERFORMANCE OF SAFETY CRITICAL WORK
(8) The construction plan shall address how the Contractor will handle contingencies such as:
A. Unplanned events (storms, traffic accidents, etc.)
B. Structural elements that don’t fit or line up
C. Work that cannot be completed in time for the roadway to be reopened to traffic
D. Replacement of workers who don’t perform the work safely
E. Equipment failure
F. Other potential difficulties inherent in the type of work being performed
(9) Name and qualifications of Contractor’s person designated to determine and notify the Engineer in
writing when it is safe to open a route to traffic after it has been closed for safety critical work.
(10) Erection plan or bridge removal plan when submitted as required elsewhere by the specifications. Plan
requirements that overlap with above requirements may be submitted only once.
A safety critical element conference shall be held two weeks prior to beginning construction on each safety
critical element. The Engineer, the Contractor, the safety critical element subcontractors, and the Contractor’s
Engineer shall attend the conference. Required pre-erection conferences or bridge removal conferences may be
included as a part of this conference.
After the safety critical element conference, and prior to beginning work on the safety critical element, the
Contractor shall submit a final construction plan to the Engineer for record purposes only. The Contractor’s
Engineer shall sign and seal temporary works, such as falsework, shoring etc., related to construction plans for the
safety critical elements, (1) Removal of Structure, (2) Railway Tracks and (3) Temporary Works. The final
construction plan shall be stamped “Approved for Construction” and signed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall perform safety critical work only when the Engineer is on the project site. The Contractor’s
Engineer shall be on site to inspect and provide written approval of safety critical work for which he provided
signed and sealed construction details. Unless otherwise directed or approved, the Contractor’s Engineer need not
be on site during the actual performance of safety critical work, but shall be present to conduct inspection for
written approval of the safety critical work.
When ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately stop safety critical work that is being performed
in an unsafe manner or will result in an unsafe situation for the traveling public. Prior to stopping work, the
Contractor shall make the situation safe for work stoppage. The Contractor shall submit an acceptable plan to
correct the unsafe process before the Engineer will authorize resumption of the work.
When ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove workers from the project that are performing the
safety critical work in a manner that creates an unsafe situation for the public in accordance with subsection
108.05.
Should an unplanned event occur or the safety critical operation deviate from the submitted plan, the Contractor
shall immediately cease operations on the safety critical element, except for performing any work necessary to
ensure worksite safety, and provide proper protection of the work and the traveling public. If the Contractor
intends to modify the submitted plan, he shall submit a revised plan to the Engineer prior to resuming operations.
All costs associated with the preparation and implementation of each safety critical element construction plan will
not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the work.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
12
3
REVISION OF SECTION 107
PERFORMANCE OF SAFETY CRITICAL WORK
Nothing in the section shall be construed to relieve the Contractor from ultimate liability for unsafe or negligent
acts or to be a waiver of the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act on behalf of the Department.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
13
REVISION OF SECTION 107
INTERRUPTION OF IRRIGATION WATER FLOW
Section 107 Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 107.14 shall include the following:
The Contractor’s attention is called to the fact that the Arthur Ditch is within the project limits on which
work is required. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide continuous flow or make arrangements
for flow interruptions as necessary if construction scheduling requires work on these facilities during
times of high groundwater flow.
Irrigation facilities adjacent to the project normally flow from April to October each year. Therefore,
construction activities that affect these facilities should be coordinated accordingly.
Work necessary to comply with these requirements, including temporary ditches or culverts, and/or
detour culverts, if necessary, will not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the prices bid for the
various bid items that occur on the project.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
14
REVISION OF SECTION 107
PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 107.12 shall include the following:
A. The Contractor shall save all existing vegetation in this area, except for those trees and shrubs which must
be removed to accommodate construction of the project.
B. The Contractor shall perform all the work in such a manner that the least environmental damage will
result. All questionable areas or items shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for approval prior to
removal or any damaging activity. Trees and/or shrubs that are damaged during construction but could
have been saved shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
C. The following measures shall be taken to protect existing trees adjacent to the project:
1. Fencing material shall encircle any trees whose outer drip line edge is within 20 feet of any
construction activities. The fencing material shall be bright, contrasting color, durable, and a
minimum of 4 feet in height. Posts used shall be comparable to metal T-post or heavier weight,
and placed to a depth of no less than 2 feet below ground level. Fencing material shall be placed at
the drip line or 15 feet from tree trunk, whichever is greater, and maintained in an upright position
throughout the duration of construction activities.
2. No material shall be placed or piled within the drip line of existing trees. No heavy objects such as
wood pallets, metal railings, etc., shall lean against or come into contact with tree trunks.
3. When root cutting is unavoidable, a clean sharp cut shall be made to avoid shredding or smashing.
Exposed roots shall be covered immediately to prevent desiccation. Where roots will be cut in a
straight line, such as behind a curb or along a sidewalk, a saw such as a concrete saw with a sharp
blade that penetrates 1 foot shall be used on top of the ground prior to excavating so that the roots
are not torn or smashed during excavation.
4. Sidewalk and pavement should be contoured sufficiently to avoid cutting surface tree roots.
Whenever possible, tree roots should be bridged or floated over with walks.
5. With the approval of the City of Fort Collins representative, if foot traffic or equipment is
unavoidable within the drip line, the area within the drip line shall be mulched with wood chips to
a depth of six inches prior to construction activity. Six inch mulch depth shall be maintained for
the duration of the project, and shall be removed upon completion of the project.
D. Measurement and Payment: All work necessary as defined in the specifications to protect the existing
trees shall not be paid for separately, but shall be included in the cost of the work.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
15
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised as follows:
Subsection 108.03 shall include the following:
Project Meetings
A. Pre-Construction Conference: A Pre-Construction Conference will be held after Notice of Award and before
the Notice to Proceed, the date, time and location will be determined after Notice of Award.
The conference shall be attended by:
1. Contractor and Contractor’s Superintendent
a. Contractor shall designate/introduce Superintendent
b. At this time the Superintendent will be expected to show that he has sufficient knowledge of
the specifications and plans to orchestrate and coordinate the construction activities for this
job.
2. Contractor’s Subcontractors (including the Traffic Control Supervisor and Surveyor)
a. Contractor shall designate/introduce major Subcontractor’s supervisors assigned to the
project
3. Engineer
4. Owner
5. Utility Companies
a. Utilities will be asked to designate their coordination person, provide utility plans, and their
anticipated schedule
6. Others as requested by the Contractor, Owner, or Engineer.
Unless previously submitted to the Owner, the Contractor shall bring to the conference a tentative schedule of
the construction project, include in the schedule shop drawings and other submittals. Any submittals
requiring long lead times and therefore must be expedited shall be submitted at the pre-construction
conference, or as soon thereafter as possible.
The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship.
Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The
agenda will include:
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
16
2
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
1. Contractor’s tentative Schedule
a. The Contractor shall submit a detailed project schedule showing milestones and the critical
path for the Arthur Ditch Replacements at Mountain Avenue and Myrtle Street. This
schedule shall be agreed to by both the Owner and Contractor. It shall be made in writing
and signed by both parties.
2. Permit applications and submittals, including Dewatering Permit, Erosion and Sediment Control
Plan, and Traffic Control Plan
3. Transmittal, review and distribution of Contractor’s submittals
4. Processing applications for payment
5. Maintaining record documents
6. Field decision and change orders
7. Use of premises, office and storage areas, staging area, security, housekeeping, and Owner’s needs
8. Proposed daily construction hours for the Engineer’s approval
9. Designation of access roads and parking
10. Contractor’s assignment of safety and first aid
B. Construction Progress Meetings for the Arthur Ditch Replacements at Mountain Avenue and Myrtle Street:
Progress meetings will be conducted weekly or at some other frequency, if approved by the Engineer. These
meetings shall be attended by the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor’s representative and any others invited
by these people.
The Engineer will conduct the meeting and the Engineer will arrange for keeping the minutes and distributing
the minutes to all persons in attendance.
The agenda of these project meetings will include construction progress, the status of submittal reviews, and
the status of information requests, critical work sequencing, review of strategies for connections into existing
facilities, status of field orders and change orders, and any general business.
The Contractor will prepare a “two week look ahead” schedule to facilitate coordination of work items.
The schedule shall be monitored closely during construction and may be updated by written agreement of the
parties as changes occur in the project progress. If the milestones are not met, the Owner may utilize the
remedies provided in the General Conditions as well as any other remedy provided by the Contract
Documents or provided by law or equity. The Owner may also assess liquidated damages as outlined in
Article 3, Section 3.2 of the Agreement.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
17
3
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
The Engineer or Engineer’s Field Representative and Contractor shall agree to weekly quantities at the
progress meetings. The weekly quantity sheets shall be signed by both parties. These quantity sheets, when
signed, shall be final and shall be the basis for the monthly progress estimates. This process ensures accurate
monthly project pay estimates.
C. The Engineer may hold coordination conferences, to be attended by all parties involved, when the
Contractor’s operations affect, or are affected by, the work of others.
1. Contractor shall participate in such conferences accompanied by Subcontractors as required by the
Engineer.
Construction Schedules
A. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed schedule of all construction operations and procurement after review
of tentative schedule by parties attending the pre-construction conference. This schedule will show how the
Contractor intends to meet the milestones set forth.
1. No work is to begin at the site until Owner’s acceptance of the Construction Progress Schedule and
Report of delivery of equipment and materials.
2. No work can begin on Mountain Avenue until November 1, 2013.
3. All work which impacts the ditch’s ability to convey water must be complete by April 15, 2014.
B. Format and Submissions
1. Prepare construction and procure schedules in a graphic format suitable for displaying scheduled and
actual progress.
2. Submit two copies of each schedule to Owner for review.
a) Owner will return one copy to contractor with revisions suggested or necessary for
coordination of the Work with the needs of Owner or others.
b) The Contractor will be required to submit a weekly progress schedule showing work to be
completed, labor, equipment, work hours and methods of construction for the upcoming
week. This schedule will be required every Thursday in a daily calendar format.
3. The schedule must show how the street, underground utilities, concrete, and paving work will be
coordinated.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
18
4
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
C. Content
1. Construction Progress Schedule
a) Show the complete work sequence of construction by activity and location.
b) Show changes to traffic control
c) Show project milestones
2. Equipment, Materials and Submittals Schedule
a) Show delivery status of critical and major items of equipment and materials
b) Include a critical path schedule for Shop Drawings, tests, and other submittal requirements
for equipment and materials.
D. Owner’s Responsibility
1. Owner’s review is only for the purpose of checking conformity with the Contract Documents and
assisting the Contractor in coordinating the Work with the needs of the Project.
2. It is not to be construed as relieving contractor from any responsibility to determine the means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction.
Modifications to Time of Completion in the Approved Schedule
The date of beginning and the time for completion of the work are essential conditions of the Contract Documents
and the work embraced shall be commenced on a date specified in the Notice to Proceed.
The Contractor will proceed with the work at such rate of progress to ensure full completion within the contract
time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner that the contract time
for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the climatic and
other factors prevailing in the locality of the work.
Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to complete the project within the "Contract Time" shown in the
proposal. The "Contract Time" anticipates "Normal" weather and climate conditions in and around the vicinity of
the Project site during the times of year that the construction will be carried out. Extensions of time based upon
weather conditions shall be granted only if the Contractor demonstrates clearly that such conditions were
"unusually severe," would not have been reasonably anticipated, and that such conditions adversely affected the
Contractor’s work and thus required additional time to complete the work.
The following specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather. The
listing below defines the anticipated number of calendar days lost to adverse weather for each month and is based
upon National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the geographic location of
the project.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
19
5
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
Monthly Anticipated Calendar Days Lost to Adverse Weather Conditions
JAN FEB MAR APR MA
Y
JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
(7) (4) (4) (4) (6) (3) (4) (2) (3) (3) (2) (5)
The above schedule of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line for monthly (or portion thereof)
weather time evaluations. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the
contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days and the impact of adverse weather days that delay the
work will be recorded on a day-to-day basis. It is assumed that the work will be carried out Mondays through
Fridays (holidays accepted) unless an approved construction schedule or written authorization from the Owner
indicates otherwise. The number of days of delayed work due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will then
be compared to the monthly adverse weather schedule above.
An actual adverse weather day must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the Contractor’s workday, delay work
critical to the timely completion of the project, and be documented by the Contractor. The City Representative
observing the construction shall determine on a daily basis whether or not work can proceed or if work is delayed
due to adverse weather or the effects thereof. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any
disagreement as to whether or not work can proceed on a given date, within 2 calendar days of that date. The
Owner will use the above written notification in determining the number of working days for which work was
delayed during each month.
At the end of each month, if the number of working days for which work was delayed due to adverse weather
exceeds that shown in the above schedule, a Change Order will be executed which increases the Contract Time.
The number of work days delayed due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will then be converted to Calendar
Days based on the contract completion day and date. This conversion assumes a 5-day work week, Mondays
through Fridays, holidays excepted; should the Contractor have authorization to work weekends and/or holidays,
and then the method of conversion of workdays to calendar days would take this into consideration. The contract
time period will then be increased by the number of calendar days calculated above and a new contract
completion day and date will be set.
The Contractor’s schedule must reflect the above-anticipated adverse weather delays on all weather-dependent
activities.
While extensions of time shall be granted for "unusually severe" weather or climate conditions, the Owner shall
make no monetary compensation for any costs to the Contractor arising out of such delays. The Contractor shall
comply with the portions of the Contract Documents relating to his project schedule and amendments thereto
which result from the "unusually severe" weather condition.
Breakdowns in equipment or lack of performance by the Contractor will not be considered justification for an
extension of time. Liquidated damages will be assessed as delineated elsewhere.
The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the delay in completion of
the work is due to the following, and the Contractor has promptly given written notice of such delay to the Owner
or Engineer.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
20
6
REVISION OF SECTION 108
PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
1. To any preference, priority, or allocation order duly issued by the Owner.
2. To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor,
including but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another
Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine
restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and abnormal and unforeseeable weather as provided above.
3. To any delays of Subcontractors occasioned by any of the causes specified in paragraphs 1 and 2, above.
Subsection 108.05 shall include the following:
The contractor shall schedule all work between 7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M Monday through Friday.
Disruption of traffic with flagged roadway closures on streets adjacent to Mountain Avenue or Myrtle Street
shall not take place before 8:30 A.M. or between 3:30 P.M. and 6:00 P.M. Night and weekend work will be
allowed only with the prior written authorization of the Engineer, and after the contractor submits and
receives approval for a noise variance from the City’s Environmental Enforcement Division. Written requests
to be submitted a minimum of (5) working days prior to the request date.
The Contractor may make emergency repairs to provide protection of the work and traveling public at any
time. All on-roadway work or work that indirectly or directly interferes with the flow of traffic shall be in
accordance with an approved Traffic Control Plan.
Unless waived by the Engineer, failure to meet these milestones will require assessment of liquidated
damages for each milestone listed above and in accordance with Subsection 108.08.
Meetings will be required to review progress and to plan upcoming activities. Representatives from the
Contractor and all active subcontractors shall attend the meetings. Such meetings will be required on a
weekly basis at a time to be determined by the City of Fort Collins and the Contractor. Additional meetings
will be held when required by the City of Fort Collins or the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit at the weekly progress meeting a written statement of planned work activities and
anticipated inspection, testing, and surveying requirements of the upcoming week. A 24 hour notice shall be
provided to the City of Fort Collins by the Contractor if the Contractor elects to change the planned work
activities.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
21
REVISION OF SECTION 201
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Section 201 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In Subsection 201.02 delete the second paragraph and replace with the following:
Clearing and grubbing shall be within the limits of the project, as identified in the plans. All other areas of
clearing and grubbing shall be as directed by the Engineer. Removal of trees less than 6” in diameter
will not be measured separately, but will be included in the cost of clearing and grubbing.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the adjacent land owner along the south side of Mountain Avenue to
remove and temporarily store the recently constructed landscape improvements. The materials will be
temporarily stored on the project by the Contractor at a location to be approved by the Engineer.
Upon completion of the structure, the Contractor shall reconstruct the landscaping feature as directed by
the Engineer.
In Subsection 201.02 delete the sixth paragraph and replace with the following:
No material or debris shall be disposed of within the project limits; and, shall be legally disposed of off-
site or preferably to a recycling center. The Contractor shall make all arrangements to obtain written
permission from property owners for disposal locations outside the limits of the project. Copies of this
written agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer before the disposal area is used.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
22
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF FIRE HYDRANT
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 202.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of the removal of fire hydrant as impacted by the proposed improvements.
Section 202.02 shall include the following:
Removal of fire hydrant shall include removal of fire hydrant, thrust block, gate valve, fire hydrant line from
the hydrant to the mainline, and all work, equipment and materials necessary to completely remove the fire
hydrant and components per CDOT spec 202 and directions of the engineer. Removals to be coordinated
with the City of Fort Collins Water Department. Abandoning any components of the fire hydrant (ie: fire
hydrant, gate valve, thrust block, fire hydrant line) is also to be included with the cost of the fire hydrant
removal.
Section 202.11 shall include the following:
Removal of fire hydrant will be measured by the number of fire hydrants removed as designated on the plans,
and specified in section 202.02 above, irrespective of the kind or size involved.
Section 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment for removal of fire hydrant shall be full compensation of labor and material required to complete the
work.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Fire Hydrant EA
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
23
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF ASPHALT MAT
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal and disposal of existing asphalt mat within the project limits as shown on the
plans or at locations directed by the Engineer.
In subsection 202.02 delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:
The existing asphalt mat shall be removed in a manner that minimizes contamination of the removed mat
with underlying material. The removed mat shall become the property of the Contractor and be disposed of
offsite.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Asphalt Mat Square Yard
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
24
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF CONCRETE BOX CULVERT
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes the removal of existing concrete box culverts at the following locations:
Mountain Avenue
Myrtle Street
Subsection 202.02 shall include the following:
The work shall include the removal the structure, including wing walls, all other attached or overlying
items and the required excavation work necessary for the complete removal of this structure.
The concrete box culverts shall be removed as shown on the plans. Temporary supports may be required.
Temporary supports will be incidental to the removals. Saw cutting to achieve removals will be
incidental. Work shall be conducted with a minimum of interference to the traveling public.
Blasting or the use of explosives will not be allowed.
The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for review two weeks prior to beginning
removal:
Details of any required false work.
Details of the proposed operations showing the methods, sequence and equipment to be used.
Permanent disposal location for removed materials.
Specific details of the removal operations will be left to the Contractor; however, times, methods, and
details of removal shall be provided to the Engineer prior to commencement of the work. The removal
plan shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in Colorado. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible for completing the work safely. The Contractor shall remove the existing structures in such
sequence and by such methods that will maintain the stability of members until all members have been
removed. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary false work if and where necessary to maintain
the stability of the structures under all conditions.
All removed materials shall become the property of and shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Unit
Removal of Concrete Box Culvert Each
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
25
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF PORTIONS OF PRESENT STRUCTURES
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal of the flagstone pavers at the Myrtle Street and Meldrum Street intersection.
Subsection 202.08 shall include the following:
Existing flagstone shall be removed as required in order to allow for the proposed work as shown on the
plans. If additional removal of adjacent concrete is required, it shall be included in the work. Blasting or
the use of explosives will not be allowed.
Specific details of the partial removal operations will be left to the Contractor; however, times, methods,
and details of removal shall be provided to the Engineer prior to commencement of the work. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for completing the work safely. The Contractor shall remove the
existing structure components in such sequence and by such methods that will maintain the stability of
members until all members have been removed. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary
falsework if and where necessary to maintain the stability of the structures under all conditions.
The Contractor shall remove the materials and deliver to the property owner as directed by the Engineer.
Any materials not accepted by the owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
disposed of accordingly.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The pay item “Removal of Sidewalk” will include saw cutting, removal and disposal of all materials
listed herein plus incidental work required to complete the work.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Unit
Removal of Sidewalk Square Yards
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
26
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF FENCE
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 202.01 shall include the following:
This work includes removal of the fencing along Myrtle Street as shown on the plans and directed by the
Engineer.
Subsection 202.02 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall remove both wooden and wire fencing as shown on the plans and as directed by the
Engineer. Coordinate with the Engineer as to which sections of fence are to be returned to the adjacent
property owners and which are to become of the property of the Contract and disposed of accordingly.
Fencing to be returned to the adjacent property owner shall be removed in such a manner so that it can be
reinstalled by the property owner.
Specific details of the partial removal operations will be left to the Contractor; however, times, methods,
and details of removal shall be provided to the Engineer prior to commencement of the work. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for completing the work safely. The Contractor shall remove the
existing fencing in such sequence and by such methods that will maintain the stability of members of any
adjacent structures until all members have been removed.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
The pay item “Removal of Fencing” will include removal and disposal of all materials listed herein plus
incidental work required to complete the work.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Unit
Removal of Fence Lineal Foot
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
27
REVISION OF SECTION 202
REMOVAL OF CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 202 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In Subsection 202.02 delete the sixth paragraph and replace with the following:
The areas of concrete pavement to be removed shall be isolated in both the longitudinal and transverse
directions by the double saw cut method of sawing in accordance with FHWA’s publication entitled
“Guide for Full-Depth Repairs”. Sawing shall be accomplished with the use of a diamond blade saw or
approved equivalent. Sawing of the concrete pavement shall be done to a true line, with a vertical face,
unless otherwise specified. Sawing shall be full depth and shall go through the existing tie-bars and dowel
bars, leaving free vertical edges at the limits of the removal. Sawcutting will be incidental to the removal.
After sawing has been completed, the deteriorated concrete shall be lifted vertically from its position
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Pavement breakers or jackhammers shall be used in the
removal process where lifting is not possible. All loose materials shall be removed from the repair area.
Removed concrete slabs and excavated soils shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
disposed of in accordance with subsection 202.07.
Subsection 202.07 shall include the following:
This work includes the removal of existing asphalt and concrete pavement within the project limits, as
shown on the plans, or at locations directed by the Engineer.
Subsection 202.11 shall include the following:
Removal of concrete pavement will be measured by the area in square yards of pavement removed,
regardless of depth. Saw cutting of existing pavement to facilitate removal to the clean lines indicated on
the plans will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the work.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
No separate measurement or payment will be made for reducing the removed material to the appropriate
sizes for incorporation into the project.
Subsection 202.12 shall include the following:
Removal of concrete pavement shall include removal of the existing bond breaker asphalt on the top of
the concrete pavement.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Removal of Concrete Pavement Square Yard
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
28
REVISION OF SECTION 206
SHORING
Section 206 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 206.08 shall include the following:
This work includes the temporary support of the Fort Collins’s Municipal Railway tracks and shoring
required to protect the existing box culvert removal operations from adjacent structures, utilities, trees and
other items.
Subsection 206.09 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall be required to develop, design and construct a shoring system for the tracks
throughout the demolition and reconstruction of the proposed Arthur Ditch structure.
Temporary supports for the tracks shall be spaced no more than 5-ft apart.
Specific shoring locations are not shown on the plans. The Engineer and Contractor shall review project
sites and proposed removal operations to confirm where shoring will be required.
Subsection 206.11 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Shoring (Area 1) Lump Sum
Shoring (Area 2) Lump Sum
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
29
REVISION OF SECTION 206
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
STRUCTURES, CULVERTS AND PIPES
Section 206 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 206.06 shall include the following:
For Storm and Sanitary Sewer Manholes and Inlets:
Structure Backfill (Flow-Fill) shall be used to backfill all manholes and inlets. The limits of flow-fill shall
be the excavation limit of the manholes. The fill shall extend upward to the proposed finish subgrade.
For Storm, Sanitary and Water Pipes:
Limits and materials for Structure Excavation and Structure Backfill for all storm, sanitary and water pipes
shall be in accordance with the City of Fort Collins Utility Trench and Pipe Bedding details as shown on the
plans. Excavation, Backfill (Class 1), Bedding (including granular bedding material up to 12 inches above
the top of the pipe) and embankment material required for all pipes will not be measured and paid for
separately, but shall be included in the work. The use of flowfill will be as directed by the Engineer or as
shown on the plans. When used, flowfill will be measured separately and paid under the flowfill line item.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
30
REVISION OF SECTION 208
EROSION CONTROL
Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 208.03 is hereby revised to include the following:
The Contractor shall provide an Erosion Control Plan that conforms to the City of Fort Collins’ MS4
requirements.
The sixth paragraph of Subsection 208.11 (beginning “Erosion Control Supervisor...”) is hereby replaced with the
following:
Erosion Control Supervisor work will be measured and paid for in accordance with subsection 208.12. The
Contractor shall record the tasks that were assigned to the Erosion Control Supervisor. The records shall be
submitted to the Engineer, weekly, after completion of the work for approval and acceptance.
Subsection 208.12 is hereby revised to include the following:
Removal and disposal of sediment will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the
work.
Payment for work under this section will be as identified in 208.12, as amended above and by other contract
special provisions. For this project, the following are the anticipated devices and pay items as tabulated in the
plans:
208 Pay Items Pay Unit
Storm Drain Inlet Protection Each
Concrete Washout Structure Each
Vehicle Tracking Pad Each
Removal and Disposal of Sediment Lump Sum
Erosion Control Supervisor Lump Sum
Other pay items (not originally anticipated or tabulated in the project) will be paid for in accordance with
208.12, at a negotiated unit cost.
Payment for installed items shall include maintenance of the device for the entire time it is in place during
construction at a given location. No separate measurement or payment will be made for replacement of the
device as required to maintain its function.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
31
REVISION OF SECTION 209
WATERING AND DUST PALLIATIVES
Section 209 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 209.08 is hereby revised as follows:
Water required for all items of work including dust palliatives and for moisture and density control will not
be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the work.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
32
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
Section 212 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 212.01 shall include the following:
Tree Retention and protection includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected
by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. The following definitions apply:
A. Retain definitions remaining after this Section has been edited.
1) Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and largest
diameters at 6 inches above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch size; and 12 inches above the
ground for trees larger than 4-inch size.
2) Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to
be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.
3) Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during
construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the
drip line unless otherwise indicated.
4) Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
Subsection 212.02 shall include the following:
(d) Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements. Previously
used materials may be used when approved by Engineer. Protection-Zone fencing will be considered
incidental to the “Tree Retention and Protection” line item and will not be paid for separately.
1. Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high-density extruded
and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch maximum opening in pattern and weighing a
minimum of 0.4 lb/ft.; remaining flexible from minus 60 to plus 200 deg F; inert to most chemicals
and acids; minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi and ultimate tensile strength of 2680 psi;
secured with plastic bands or galvanized-steel or stainless-steel wire ties; and supported by tubular
or T-shape galvanized-steel posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart.
a. Height: 5 feet
b. Color: High-visibility orange, nonfading.
Add Subsection 212.061 immediately following Subsection 212.06
212.061 Tree Retention and Protection
A. SUBMITTALS
1. First three paragraphs below are defined in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" as
"Action Submittals."
1) Samples for Verification: For each type of the following:
a. Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from
full-size components.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
33
2
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
2) Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which
establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction
activities.
a. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.
b. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree
or other plants designated to remain.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1) Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
a. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment
needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Enforcing requirements for protection zones.
3. Field quality control.
C. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
a. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
b. Parking vehicles or equipment.
c. Foot traffic.
d. Impoundment of water.
e. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
f. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.
3. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and
organic mulch.
D. PREPARATION
Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Tie a 1-inch blue-
vinyl tape around each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.
Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing,
or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by
dewatering operations.
Within the drip line of any protected existing tree, there shall be no cut or fill over a four-inch depth unless a
qualified arborist or forester has evaluated and approved the disturbance.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
34
3
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
Prior and during construction, barriers shall be erected around all protected existing trees with such barriers to
be of orange fencing a minimum of (5) feet in height, secured with metal T-Posts, no closer than six (6) feet
from the trunk or at the drip line, whichever is greater. There shall be no storage or movement of equipment,
material, debris or fill within the fenced tree protection zone. Modification of protective fence locations to
accommodate construction shall be approved by the City Forester prior to moving or erecting a protective
fence. Where the drip line of trees touch or overlap, place fence around groups of trees.
During construction there shall be no cleaning of equipment or materials or the storage and disposal of waste
material such as paints, oils, solvents, asphalt, concrete, motor oil or any other material harmful to the life of a
tree within the drip line of any protected tree or group of trees.
No damaging attachments, wires, signs or permits may be fastened to any protected tree.
The installation of utilities, irrigation lines or any underground fixture requiring excavation deeper than six (6)
inches shall be accomplished by boring under the root system of protected existing trees at a minimum depth
of twenty-four (24) inches. The auger distance is established from the face of the tree (outer bark) and is scaled
from the tree diameter at breast height as described in the tree protection chart of the Fort Collins Land use
Code Section 3.2.1.
Construction shall be performed in a manner to not damage any existing tree. Clearance pruning of any tree on
site shall only be by a Fort Collins Licensed Arborist under the direction of the City Forester.
Equipment access/drives shall be positioned to minimize travel over the root system of any existing tree.
Equipment drive locations over the root system of any significant tree shall be approved by the City Forester
with requirements to protect the compaction of exposed soil.
Prior to construction the contractor shall meet the City Forester on site to verify protected existing trees and
the application of tree protection specifications.
The Contractor shall wrap protected trees with concrete blankets or equivalent treatment whenever directed by
the owner’s representative.
E. TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES
Verify details of protection-zone fencing before retaining last option in first paragraph below.
Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or
equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people from
easily entering protected. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle
intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street
intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation.
Retain first subparagraph below for chain-link fencing.
Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
35
4
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by
construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in
good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and
equipment has been removed from the site.
1) Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment
access through the protection zone.
F. EXCAVATION
Retain this article if construction or utility excavation near or through protection zones is required.
General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to
requirements in Section 200 Earth Work.
Retain first paragraph below if trenching is required near trees.
Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or
around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral
tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for
root pruning.
Retain first paragraph below to limit damage to roots of valuable trees or delete if not required. Procedure is
expensive.
Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond
excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent
to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches back from
new construction and as required for root pruning.
Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or
pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and
protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.
G. ROOT PRUNING
Retain first paragraph below if construction excavation near or within a tree- or plant-protection zone is
unavoidable.
Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Pruning roots 2” in diameter or
greater must be reviewed by City Forester prior to pruning. Prune roots as shown on Drawings and as
follows:
1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do
not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or
pulls roots.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and
covered with soil.
3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
4. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 200 Earth Work.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
36
5
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots 12 inches outside of the protection zone, by cleanly
cutting all roots impacted to the depth of the required excavation.
H. CROWN PRUNING
Prune all existing trees retained on City property by cleaning and thinning the canopy. Prune branches that
are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as shown on the Drawings and as
follows:
1. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to the City of Fort Collins Tree Management
Standards
I. REGRADING
Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
Lowering the grade within a protection zone should be minimal in area and depth and can be fatal to trees.
Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection
zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
Raising grade within a protection zone should be minimal in area and depth and can be fatal to trees.
Measures must provide adequate aeration of feeder roots. Coordinate description with details on Drawings.
J. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are
damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect/Owner’s Rep.
1. Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs.
2. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to an ISA certified arborist's written
instructions.
3. Perform repairs within 24 hours.
4. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by
Landscape Architect/Owner’s Rep.
Protected trees that are damaged during construction will be appraised by a qualified arborist, and the amount
of damage appraised will be billed to the Contractor.
Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that
Landscape Architect/Owner’s Rep determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.
1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures
6 inches or smaller in caliper size.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
37
6
REVISION OF SECTION 212
TREE RETENTION AND PROTECTION
K. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
General requirements for progress cleaning and waste disposal, including prohibition on burning waste
materials on-site, are specified in Section 017300 "Execution."
Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
Subsection 212.07 shall include the following:
Tree retention and protection will not be measured, but will be paid for on a lump sum basis. The lump
sum price bid will be full compensation for all work required to complete the item, including installation
and maintenance of protection-zone fencing.
Subsection 212.08 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Tree Retention and Protection Lump Sum
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
38
REVISION OF SECTION 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 412 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 412.10 shall include the following:
Formwork and materials required to construct the variable height barrier curb shall be included in the
driveway placement activities.
Subsection 412.23 shall include the following:
Measurement for the concrete driveway (6 inch) shall include the limits of the variable height barrier curbs
required along the radial limits of the concrete driveways.
Subsection 412.24 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Concrete Driveway (6 inch) Square Yard
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
39
REVISION OF SECTION 420
GEOSYNTHETICS
Section 420 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In Subsection 420.01, shall include the following:
At the Myrtle Street location, the Hot Mix Asphalt shall include a geosynthetic pavement interlayer (GPI)
placed between the asphalt lifts.
In Subsection 420.02, shall include the following:
The geosynthetic pavement interlayer (GPI) shall be a Tensar GlassGrid GG 8512, or approved
equivalent.
In Subsection 420.03, shall include the following:
The geosynthetic pavement interlayer (GPI) shall be placed between the lower and upper HMA lifts. The
GPI should be placed over the east and west edges of the CBC for the entire width of the roadway.
The GPI should be approximately 5 feet wide and be centered along each of the CBC edges.
The stronger tensile strength direction of the GPI should be in the longitudinal direction of the roadway.
The GPI should be installed in accordance with the GPI manufacturer’s guidelines.
In Subsection 420.10, shall include the following:
Payment shall be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Geosynthetic Pavement Interlayer Square Yard
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
40
REVISION OF SECTION 603
CULVERTS AND SEWERS
Section 603 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In Subsection 603.12, delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:
Inlet connections to storm sewer mains shall include all excavation, backfill, labor, equipment, fittings,
collars, grout and incidentals required to make the connection complete in place. Inlet connections will not
be measured and paid for separately but shall be included in the work.
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
41
REVISION OF SECTION 607
FENCE (SPECIAL)
Section 607 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 607.01 shall include the following:
This work includes constructing the wooden fencing and gates along Myrtle Street as shown on the plans
and as directed by the Engineer.
Subsection 607.02 shall include the following:
Materials required for the wooden fencing include the vertical posts, boards, horizontal rail and cap
lumber, fencing hardware, fasteners and concrete for the posts.
Lumber shall be new and of similar size and construction of the existing wooden fencing. Lumber shall
be in accordance with ASTM F537, or as approved by the Engineer.
Any additional materials needed for the fencing, including an approved wood preservative shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review.
Subsection 607.03 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall construct the fencing and gates at locations as shown on the plans and as directed by
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit working drawings to the Engineer to include materials, layout, gate locations,
and details as needed for the proposed construction. Working drawings that confirm the different fence
heights shall be included.
Subsection 607.04 shall include the following:
Fence (Special) will be measured by the linear foot and include the work required to set fence posts,
install railing, wood panels, gates and hardware. Measurement will be along the base of the fence from
center to center of the extreme end posts, and shall include all wood, hardware, concrete, reinforcing
steel, excavation and backfill, and all other incidentals to the erection of the fence.
Separate measurements will not be made for the different fence heights. Gate materials, hardware and
installation will not be measured separately but included in the cost of the pay item, Fence (Special).
Subsection 607.05 shall include the following:
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Fence (Special) Linear Foot
Payment per linear foot shall include all costs for working drawings and complete installation of posts, horizontal
members, and vertical panels as required by the plans. All other incidental hardware required will not be
measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the work
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
42
REVISION OF SECTION 609
CURB
Section 609 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 609.01 shall include the following:
The section for 4” Barrier Curb shall be as shown in the plans.
Subsection 609.07 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
4” Barrier Curb Linear Foot
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
43
REVISION OF SECTION 619
WATER LINE LOWERINGS AND WATER SERVICE LOWERINGS
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of the construction of water line lowering.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
The water line lowerings and water service lowerings shall be done in accordance to the construction plans
and under the direction of the project engineer.
Additional water valves may be required to complete water main lowerings in order to minimize the
inconvenience to customers per the direction of the engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Water line lowerings and will be measured by the number lowered per the construction plans.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for water line lowering will include all materials, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, pipe, casing pipe, all necessary fittings, installing pipe and all necessary fittings, cut in
gate valves as required per direction of the engineer, blowoff valves, reducers, bends, meg-a-lug retainer
glands, polywrap, gravity blocks and rebar, freeze protection, restraints, steel casing pipe, gravity anchors,
bedding, flowable fill for backfill, placing backfill to sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal and disposal of
excess soil, testing of water line and service, and all other necessary labor, materials and equipment needed
for a complete job to lower in accordance with the construction plans and specifications. All materials shown
on the details are to be included in the cost of the water line lowering.
Pay Item Pay Unit
8” Waterline Lowering EA
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
44
REVISION OF SECTION 619
WATER SERVICE
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of the installation of a water service from the new waterline. Contractor to match existing
tap size. Plan on ¾” for all new services. Work includes the creation of the ¾” service and all necessary
materials to create the service. Copper pipe connecting to existing piping will be paid separately. Work will
also include the connection of existing service lines from the south side of the roadway to the new waterline.
Anticipate three connections.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
The water services shall be done in accordance to the construction plans, specs, and under the direction of the
project engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Water service will be measured by the complete number of water services installed.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for water service will include all materials, tapping saddle, corp stop, cutting of copper pipe,
removal of copper pipe, copper pipe connections, fittings, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, pipe, all necessary fittings for a complete installation, bedding, backfill, placing backfill
to sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal and disposal of excess soil, testing of water line and service, and
all other necessary labor, materials and equipment needed for a complete job to install water service in
accordance with the construction plans and specifications. The meter pit and water meter are included in the
cost of the water service.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Water Service EA
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
45
REVISION OF SECTION 619
FIRE HYDRANTS ASSEMBLY
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of the installation of a fire hydrant assembly. This line item shall also include the 6” gate
valve, 8”x8”x6” tee, locate station, and 6” PVC pipe from the hydrant to the new main water line necessary to
install the fire hydrant.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
The fire hydrant assembly installation shall be done in accordance to the construction plans, specs, and under
the direction of the project engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Fire hydrant assemblies will be measured by the number installed per the construction plans.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for fire hydrant shall include the fire hydrant, tapping saddle, the pipe and fittings on the pvc pipe
from the fire hydrant to the main water line, locate station, fire hydrant line from the hydrant to the main line,
thrust blocks, connection and fittings required to connect the pipe to the main line, valves, furnishings,
transporting, and installing all materials, connecting to existing pipes or structures, excavation including over-
excavation to remove unsuitable foundation material and replacement with suitable granular material, water
control and dewatering, sheeting and/or bracing, concrete, flowfill, thrust blocks and reinforcements, harness
rods and meg-a-lugs; gaskets, including all pipe and fittings incorporated within the assembly, blow off
valves, cutting existing waterline where required, backfilling with native material (unless deemed unsuitable)
or otherwise noted on the drawings; and compaction, and all other materials, equipment and work associated
with fire hydrant assembly construction from the mainline to the fire hydrant in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
The cost to adjust the gate valve associated with the fire hydrant to grade is included with the cost of the
hydrant.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Fire Hydrant Assembly EA
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
46
REVISION OF SECTION 619
8 INCH PVC (C900)(WATERLINE)
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
Installation of the waterline shall also conform to the City of Fort Collins Utilities specifications for waterline
installation. Tracer wire will need to be installed with the waterline and will be considered incidental to the
work.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for waterline will include all materials, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, pipe, all necessary fittings for a complete installation, installing pipe and all necessary
fittings, tracer wire, bedding, backfill, placing backfill to sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal and
disposal of excess soil, removal, disposal and replacement of curb and gutter and sidewalk, testing of water
line and service, tracer wire, and all other necessary labor, materials and equipment needed for a complete job
to install the waterline in accordance with the construction plans and specifications.
Pay Item Pay Unit
8 Inch PVC Pipe (C900)(Waterline) LF
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
47
REVISION OF SECTION 619
COPPER PIPE
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of installing new copper pipe from the ¾” service tap to existing services lines as
appropriate. New copper pipe will be needed for the north side connections in order to extend existing
services to the new waterline.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
The installation of copper pipe shall be done in accordance to the construction plans, specifications, and under
the direction of the project engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Copper pipe will be measured by the lineal foot. All fittings and couplers shall be incidental to the cost of the
copper pipe.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for this line item will include all materials, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, pipe, all necessary fittings and couplers for a complete installation, installing pipe and all
necessary fittings, bedding, backfill, placing backfill to sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal and disposal
of excess soil, removal, testing of water line and service, and all other necessary labor, materials and
equipment needed for a complete job to install the copper pipe in accordance with the construction plans and
specifications.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Copper Pipe LF
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
48
REVISION OF SECTION 619
PLUG EXISTING 4” PIPE
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of cutting and plugging the existing 4” ductile iron pipe at the NE corner of Sherwood
Street and Myrtle Street. Plug to be a mechanical plug with a concrete thrust block. Plug must be approved
prior to use. Coordinate with the City of Fort Collins Utilities regarding waterline shutdown in order to
perform this work.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
Work shall be done in accordance to the construction plans, specifications, and under the direction of the
project engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Cutting and plugging the existing 4” ductile iron pipe will be a lump sum cost. All work and materials
necessary to complete the plugging shall be incidental to the cost of the line item.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for this line item will include all materials, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, all necessary fittings for a complete installation, sawing of existing pipe, mechanical
plug, concrete thrust block, bedding, backfill, placing backfill to sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal and
disposal of excess soil, removal, and all other necessary labor, materials and equipment needed for a complete
job to plug the existing 4” ductile iron pipe in accordance with the construction plans and specifications.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Plug Existing 4” Pipe LS
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
49
REVISION OF SECTION 619
CONNECT TO EXISTING 8” PVC PIPE
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of connecting the new 8” PVC (C900) waterline to the existing 8” PVC line. This item
will also include the 8” solid sleeve necessary to make this connection. As part of this work, the existing 4”
gate valve will be abandoned. Coordinate with the City representative on how to abandon the 4” gate valve.
If it is to be disposed, 4” gate valve should be disposed of accordingly.
Coordinate with the City of Fort Collins Utilities regarding waterline shutdown in order to perform this work.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
Work shall be done in accordance to the construction plans, specifications, and under the direction of the
project engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Connecting to the existing 8” PVC pipe will be a lump sum cost. All work and materials necessary to
complete the connection shall be incidental to the cost of the line item.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for this line item will include all materials, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, all necessary fittings for a complete installation, solid sleeving, abandoning the existing
4” gate valve, bedding, backfill, placing backfill to sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal and disposal of
excess soil, removal, and all other necessary labor, materials and equipment needed for a complete job to
connect the new PVC (C900) pipe to the existing PVC pipe in accordance with the construction plans and
specifications.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Connect to Existing 8” PVC Pipe LS
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
50
REVISION OF SECTION 619
CONNECT TO EXISTING 6” PVC PIPE
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of connecting the new 8” PVC (C900) waterline to the existing 6” PVC line in Sherwood
Street. As part of this item, Contractor will provide the following:
• 6” Tapping Saddle
• 6” Resilient Seat Gate Valve
• 8”x6” Reducer
The above will be incidental to the Connect to the Existing 6” PVC Pipe line item.
The City of Fort Collins will perform the tapping of the existing 6” line. Contractor to coordinate with the
City of Fort Collins Utilities to schedule this work. Coordination will be incidental to the line item.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
Work shall be done in accordance to the construction plans, specifications, and under the direction of the
project engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Connecting to the existing 6” PVC pipe will be a lump sum cost. All work and materials necessary to
complete the connection shall be incidental to the cost of the line item.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for this line item will include all materials, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, all necessary fittings, including the 6” gate valve and 8”x6” reducer, for a complete
installation, 6” tapping saddle, abandoning the existing 4” gate valve, bedding, backfill, placing backfill to
sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal and disposal of excess soil, removal, and all other necessary labor,
materials and equipment needed for a complete job to connect the new PVC (C900) pipe to the existing PVC
pipe in accordance with the construction plans and specifications.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Connect to Existing 6” PVC Pipe LS
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
51
REVISION OF SECTION 619
ABANDON VALVE
Section 619 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Section 619.01 shall include the following:
This work consists of abandoning an existing water valve in place and removing the top section of this valve
to below subgrade elevations as defined in the plans.
Section 619.03 shall include the following:
Work shall be done in accordance to the construction plans, specifications, and under the direction of the
project engineer.
Section 619.04 shall include the following:
Abandoning the water valve in place and removing the top section of the valve to below subgrade elevations
will be measured by the complete number of water valves abandoned in place. All work and materials
necessary to complete this construction shall be incidental to the cost of the line item.
Section 619.05 shall include the following:
Payment for this line item will include all materials, transportation, location and protection of utilities,
excavation, shoring, sawing, bedding, backfill, placing backfill to sub grade, disinfecting, testing, removal
and disposal of excess soil, removal, and all other necessary labor, materials and equipment needed for a
complete job to abandon the water valve in place at an elevation below the subgrade in accordance with the
construction plans and specifications.
Pay Item Pay Unit
Abandon Valve EA
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
52
REVISION OF SECTION 630
CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 630.14 shall include the following:
Construction traffic control will not be measured separately but will be paid for on a lump sum basis.
This lump sum basis shall include all anticipated traffic control devices that are shown on the plans or any
other devices that may be requested by the Engineer to ensure safety on the project. Prior to construction
of the work, a traffic control plan will need to be submitted and approved by the City of Fort Collins. The
Traffic Control Plan will need to be submitted at least two weeks prior to the anticipated construction start
date. Due to the full closures at both locations, anticipate the use of variable message boards.
Traffic control management and traffic control inspection will not be measured and paid for separately
but shall be included in the cost of the work. It is anticipated that traffic control management services
(TCM) will only be required during the initial set-up of required traffic control devices.
Secondary line items for variable message boards and flagging have been included in the project. These
line items are intended for specialty events when additional message boards and flagging is needed up and
above what is necessary for the construction zone traffic control for the project. The Engineer will direct
when additional message boards and flagging are to be used on the project.
Subsection 630.15 hereby revises as follows:
Delete paragraph 1, 2, 3 including Pay Item Table and replace with the following:
Payment shall be made at the contract lump sum price for Construction Traffic Control and will be full
compensation for all work necessary to complete the work.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Construction Traffic Control Lump Sum
Variable Message Board Day
Flagging (Special) Hour
ARTHUR DITCH CBC REPLACEMENTS September 2013
MOUNTAIN AVENUE AND MYRTLE STREETS
53
UTILITIES
Known utilities within the limits of this project are:
Company Contact Phone
Xcel Energy (Electrical) Stephanie Rich 970-225-7865
Xcel Energy (Gas) Stephanie Rich 970-225-7828
Fort Collins Water Utilities Brian Campbell 970-221-6232
Fort Collins Water Utilities Brian Campbell 970-221-6232
Comcast Don Kapperman 970-567-0245
Century Link Bill Johnson 970-490-7501
The work described in these plans and specifications requires coordination between the Contractor and the utility
companies in accordance with subsection 105.11 in conducting their respective operations as necessary to
complete the utility work with minimum delay to the project. Also, in accordance with the plans and
specifications, and as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall keep each utility owner advised of any work
being done to its facility, so that each utility owner can coordinate its inspections for final acceptance of the work
with the Engineer.
The work listed below shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the plans and specifications, and
as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall keep each utility company advised of any work being done to
its facility, so that the utility company can coordinate its inspections for final acceptance of the work with the
Engineer.
Contractor shall adjust manholes, valve boxes, and water meters in locations indicated on the plans.
The work listed below will be performed by the utility owners or their agents:
Sign Removals
Signing and Striping
GENERAL:
The Contractor shall comply with Article 1.5 of Title 9, CRS ("Excavation Requirements") when excavation or
grading is planned in the area of underground utility facilities. The Contractor shall notify all affected utilities at
least two (2) business days, not including the day of notification, prior to commencing such operations. The
Contractor shall contact the Utility Notification Center of Colorado (UNCC) at (8-1-1) or 1-800-922-1987 to have
locations of UNCC registered lines marked by member companies. All other underground facilities shall be
located by contacting the respective company. Utility service laterals shall also be located prior to beginning
excavating or grading.
The location of utility facilities as shown on the plan and profile sheets, and herein described, were obtained from
the best available information.
All costs incidental to the foregoing requirements will not be paid for separately but shall be included in the work.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 103
COLORADO RESIDENT BID PREFERENCE
Section 103 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 103.01 shall include the following:
(a) Colorado Resident Bid Preference. A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference against a nonresident
bidder from a state or foreign country equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country
in which the nonresident bidder is a resident.
Resident bidder means:
(1) A person, partnership, corporation, or joint venture which is authorized to transact business in Colorado
and which maintains its principal place of business in Colorado: or,
(2) A person, partnership, corporation, or joint venture which is authorized to transact business in Colorado,
which maintains a place of business in Colorado, and which has paid Colorado unemployment
compensation taxes in at least seventy-five percent of the eight quarters immediately prior to bidding on a
construction contract for a public project.
To determine the resident bid preference status of a bidder, the bidder shall submit a completed Form 604
with the proposal. Failure to submit the residency Form with the proposal will be justification for and may
result in the rejection of the proposal and forfeiture of the proposal guaranty.
The proposals will be treated as follows:
(1) All proposals will be checked for accuracy by the Department.
(2) The dollar amount of the checked proposal from nonresident bidders will be adjusted by a percentage
equal to the percentage preference given or required by the state or foreign country of the bidder’s
residency. If the state or foreign country does not give or require a residency preference, no adjustment
in the proposal dollar amount will be made.
(3) Adjusted proposals from nonresident bidders will then be compared to proposals from resident bidders,
and the bidder with the lowest total will be considered the apparent low bidder.
(4) Should a nonresident bidder be the apparent low bidder, in accordance with paragraph (3) above, an
award will be made on the basis of the original proposal, not the adjusted proposal.
(5) The Department will proceed with its normal award procedure.
January 31, 2013
1
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsections 105.22, 105.23 and 105.24 and replace with the following:
105.22 Dispute Resolution. Subsections 105.22, 105.23, and 105.24 detail the process through which the
parties (CDOT and the Contractor) agree to resolve any issue that may result in a dispute. The intent of the
process is to resolve issues early, efficiently, and as close to the project level as possible. Figure 105-1 in the
standard special provisions outlines the process. Specified time frames may be extended by mutual agreement
of the Engineer and the Contractor. In these subsections, when a time frame ends on a Saturday, Sunday or
holiday, the time frame shall be extended to the next scheduled work day.
A dispute is a disagreement concerning contract price, time, interpretation of the Contract, or all three between
the parties at the project level regarding or relating to the Contract. Disputes include, but are not limited to, any
disagreement resulting from a delay, a change order, another written order, or an oral order from the Project
Engineer, including any direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination by the Project Engineer,
interpretations of the Contract provisions, plans, or specifications or the existence of alleged differing site
conditions.
The term "merit" refers to the right of a party to recover on a claim or dispute, irrespective of quantum, based on
the substance, elements, and grounds of that claim or dispute. The term "quantum" refers to the quantity or
amount of compensation or time deserved when a claim or dispute is found to have merit.
Disputes from subcontractors, material suppliers, or any other entity not party to the Contract shall be submitted
through the Contractor. Review of a pass-through dispute does not create privity of Contract between CDOT and
the subcontractor.
If CDOT does not respond within the specified timelines, the Contractor may advance the dispute to the next
level.
When the Project Engineer is a Consultant Project Engineer, actions, decisions, and determinations specified
herein as made by the Project Engineer shall be made by the Resident Engineer.
The dispute resolution process set forth in this subsection shall be exhausted in its entirety prior to initiation of
litigation or arbitration. Failure to comply with the requirements set forth in this subsection shall bar either party
from any further administrative, equitable, or legal remedy. If a deadline is missed that does not prejudice either
party, further relief shall be allowed.
All disputes and claims shall be submitted within 30 days of the date of the certified letter submitting the CDOT
Form 96, Contractor Acceptance of Final Estimate, to the Contractor. Failure to submit a dispute or claim within
this time period releases the State of Colorado from all disputes and claims for which notice has not already been
submitted in accordance with the Contract.
All disputes and claims seeking damages calculated on a Total Cost or Modified Total Cost basis will not be
considered unless the party asserting such damages establishes all the legal requirements therefore, which
include:
(1) The nature of the particular losses makes it impossible or highly impractical to determine them with a
reasonable degree of accuracy.
(2) The Contractor’s bid or estimate was realistic.
(3) The Contractor’s actual costs were reasonable.
(4) The Contractor was not responsible for the cost overrun.
January 31, 2013
2
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
Should the Contractor’s dispute use the Total Cost approach for calculating damages, damages will be
determined by subtracting the contract amount from the total cost of performance. Should the Contractor’s dispute
use the Modified Total Cost approach for calculating damages, if the Contractor’s bid was unrealistic in part,
and/or some of its costs were unreasonable and/or some of its damages were caused by its own errors, those
costs and damages will be deducted from the total cost of performance to arrive at the Modified Total Cost. The
Total Cost or Modified Total Cost basis for calculating damages shall not be available for any disputes or claims
seeking damages where the Contractor could have kept separate cost records at the time the dispute arose as
described in subsection 105.22(a).
(a) Document Retention. The Contractor shall keep full and complete records of the costs and additional time
incurred for each dispute for a period of at least three years after the date of final payment or until dispute is
resolved, whichever is more. The Contractor, subcontractors, and lower tier subcontractors shall provide
adequate facilities, acceptable to the Engineer, for an audit during normal business hours. The Contractor
shall permit the Engineer or Department auditor to examine and copy those records and all other records
required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in the dispute. The Contractor shall
identify and segregate any documents or information that the Contractor considers particularly sensitive, such
as confidential or proprietary information.
Throughout the dispute, the Contractor and the Project Engineer shall keep complete daily records of extra
costs and time incurred, in accordance with the following procedures:
1. Daily records shall identify each operation affected, the specific locations where work is affected, and the
potential effect to the project’s schedule. Such records shall also reflect all labor, material, and
equipment applicable to the affected operations.
2. On the first work day of each week following the date of the written notice of dispute, the Contractor shall
provide the Project Engineer with the daily records for the preceding week. If the Contractor’s records
indicate costs greater than those kept by the Department, the Project Engineer will meet with the
Contractor and present his records to the Contractor at the meeting. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer in writing within three work days of any inaccuracies noted in, or disagreements with, the
Department’s records.
(b) Initial Dispute Resolution Process. To initiate the dispute resolution process the Contractor shall provide a
written notice of dispute to the Project Engineer upon the failure of the Parties to resolve the issue through
negotiation. Disputes will not be considered unless the Contractor has first complied with specified issue
resolution processes such as those specified in subsections 104.02, 106.05, 108.07(a), and 108.07(d).
The Contractor shall supplement the written notice of dispute within 15 days with a written Request for
Equitable Adjustment (REA) providing the following:
(1) The date of the dispute
(2) The nature of the circumstances which caused the dispute
(3) A statement explaining in detail the specific provisions of the Contract and any basis, legal or factual,
which support the dispute.
(4) If any, the estimated quantum, calculated in accordance with methods set forth in subsection
105.24(b)12., of the dispute with supporting documentation
(5) An analysis of the progress schedule showing the schedule change or disruption if the Contractor is
asserting a schedule change or disruption.
The Contractor shall submit as much information on the quantum and impacts to the Contract time as is
reasonably available with the REA and then supplement the REA as additional information becomes
available. If the dispute escalates to the DRB process the DRB shall not hear any issue or consider any
information that was not contained in the Request for Equitable Adjustment and fully submitted to the Project
Engineer and Resident Engineer during the 105.22 process.
January 31, 2013
3
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
(c) Project Engineer Review. Within 15 days after receipt of the REA, the Project Engineer will meet with the
Contractor to discuss the merits of the dispute. Within seven days after this meeting, the Project Engineer will
issue a written decision on the merits of the dispute.
The Project Engineer will either deny the merits of the dispute or notify the Contractor that the dispute has
merit. This determination will include a summary of the relevant facts, Contract provisions supporting the
determination, and an evaluation of all scheduling issues that may be involved.
If the dispute is determined to have merit, the Contractor and the Project Engineer will determine the
adjustment in payment, schedule, or both within 30 days. When a satisfactory adjustment is determined, it
shall be implemented in accordance with subsections 106.05, 108.08, 109.04, 109.05 or 109.10 and the
dispute is resolved.
If the Contractor accepts the Project Engineer's denial of the merits of the dispute, the dispute is resolved and
no further action will be taken. If the Contractor does not respond in seven days, it will be assumed he has
accepted the denial. If the Contractor rejects the Project Engineer's denial of the merits of the dispute or a
satisfactory adjustment of payment or schedule cannot be agreed upon within 30 days, the Contractor may
further pursue resolution of the dispute by providing written notice to the Resident Engineer within seven
days, according to subsection 105.22(d).
(d) Resident Engineer Review. Within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's written notice to the Resident
Engineer of unsatisfactory resolution of the dispute, the Project Engineer and Resident Engineer will meet
with the Contractor to discuss the dispute. Meetings shall continue weekly for a period of up to 30 days and
shall include a Contractor's representative with decision authority above the project level.
If these meetings result in resolution of the dispute, the resolution will be implemented in accordance with
subsections 108.08, 109.04, 109.05, or 109.10 and the dispute is resolved.
If these meetings do not result in a resolution or the participants mutually agree that they have reached an
impasse, the dispute shall be presented to the Dispute Review Board in accordance with subsection 105.23.
105.23 Dispute Review Board. A Dispute Review Board (DRB) is an independent third party that will provide
specialized expertise in technical areas and administration of construction contracts. The DRB will assist in and
facilitate the timely and equitable resolution of disputes between CDOT and the Contractor in an effort to avoid
animosity and construction delays, and to resolve disputes as close to the project level as possible. The DRB
shall be established and operate as provided herein and shall serve as an independent and impartial board.
There are two types of DRBs: the "On Demand DRB" and the "Standing DRB". The DRB shall be an "On
Demand DRB" unless a "Standing DRB" is specified in the Contract. An On Demand DRB shall be established
only when the Project Engineer initiates a DRB review in accordance with subsection 105.23(a). A Standing
DRB, when specified in the Contract, shall be established at the beginning of the project.
(a) Initiation of Dispute Review Board Review. When a dispute has not been resolved in accordance with
subsection 105.22, the Project Engineer will initiate the DRB review process within 5 days after the period
described in subsection 105.22(d).
(b) Formation of Dispute Review Board. DRBs will be established in accordance with the following procedures:
1. CDOT, in conjunction with the Colorado Contractors Association, will maintain a statewide list of
suggested DRB candidates experienced in construction processes and the interpretation of contract
documents and the resolution of construction disputes. The Board members shall be experienced in
highway and transportation projects. After December 31, 2013 only individuals who have completed
training (currently titled DRB Administration & Practice Training) through the Dispute Resolution Board
Foundation or otherwise approved by CDOT can be a DRB member. When a DRB is formed, the parties
shall execute the agreement set forth in subsection 105.23(l).
2. If the dispute has a value of $250,000 or less, the On Demand DRB shall have one member. The
Contractor and CDOT shall select the DRB member and execute the agreement within 30 days of
initiating the DRB process. If the parties do not agree on the DRB member, each shall select five
candidates. Each party shall numerically rank their list using a scale of one to five with one being their
January 31, 2013
4
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
first choice and five being their last choice. If common candidates are listed, but the parties cannot
agree, that common candidate with the lowest combined numerical ranking shall be selected. If there is
no common candidate, the lists shall be combined and each party shall eliminate three candidates from
the list. Each party shall then numerically rank the remaining candidates, with No. 1 being the first
choice. The candidate with the lowest combined numerical ranking shall be the DRB member. The
CDOT Project Engineer will be responsible for having all parties execute the agreement.
3. If the dispute has a value over $250,000, the On Demand DRB shall have three members. The
Contractor and CDOT shall each select a member and those two members shall select a third. Once the
third member is approved the three members will nominate one of them to be the Chair and execute the
agreement within 45 days of initiating the DRB process.
4. The Standing DRB shall always have three members. The Contractor and CDOT shall each select a
member and those two members shall select a third member. Once the third member is approved the
three members will nominate one of them to be the Chair.. The Contractor and CDOT shall submit their
proposed Standing DRB members within 5 days of execution of the Contract. The third member shall be
selected within 15 days of execution of the Contract. Prior to construction starting the parties shall
execute the Three Party Agreement. The CDOT Project Engineer will be responsible for having all
parties execute the agreement. The Project Engineer will invite the Standing DRB members to the
Preconstruction and any Partnering conferences.
5. DRB members shall not have been involved in the administration of the project under consideration. DRB
candidates shall disclose to the parties the following relationships:
(1) Prior employment with either party
(2) Prior or current financial interests or ties to either party
(3) Prior or current professional relationships with either party
(4) Anything else that might bring into question the impartiality or independence of the DRB member
(5) Prior to agreeing to serve on a DRB, members shall notify all parties of any other CDOT DRB’s they
are serving or that they will be participating in another DRB.
If either party objects to the selection of a potential DRB member based on the disclosures of the
potential member, that potential member shall not be placed on the Board.
6. There shall be no ex parte communications with the DRB at any time.
7. The service of a Board member may be terminated only by written agreement of both parties.
8. If a Board member resigns, is unable to serve, or is terminated, a new Board member shall be selected
within four weeks in the same manner as the Board me member who was removed was originally
selected.
(c) Additional Responsibilities of the Standing Disputes Review Board
1. General. Within 120 days after the establishment of the Board, the Board shall meet at a mutually
agreeable location to:
(1) Obtain copies of the Contract documents and Contractor's schedules for each of the Board members.
(2) Agree on the location of future meetings, which shall be reasonably close to the project site.
(3) Establish an address and telephone number for each Board member for the purposes of Board
business.
2. Regular meetings. Regular meetings of the Board shall be held approximately every 120 to 180 days
throughout the life of the Contract, except that this schedule may be modified to suit developments on the
job as the work progresses. Regular meetings shall be attended by representatives of the Contractor and
the Department.
3. The Board shall establish an agenda for each meeting which will cover all items that the Board considers
necessary to keep it abreast of the project such as construction status, schedule, potential problems and
January 31, 2013
5
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
solutions, status of past claims and disputes, and potential claims and disputes. Copies of each agenda
shall be submitted to the Contractor and the Department at least seven days before the meeting date.
Oral or written presentations or both shall be made by the Contractor and the Department as necessary
to give the Board all the data the Board requires to perform its functions. The Board will prepare minutes
of each meeting, circulate them to all participants for comments and approval, and issue revised minutes
before the next meeting. As a part of each regular meeting, a field inspection trip of all active segments of
the work at the project site may be made by the Board, the Contractor, and the Department.
4. Advisory Opinions
(1) Advisory opinions are typically used soon after the parties find they have a potential dispute and have
conducted preliminary negotiations but before expenditure of additional resources and hardening their
positions. Advisory opinions provide quick insight into the DRB’s likely assessment of the dispute.
This process is quick and may be entirely oral and does not prejudice the opportunity for a DRB
hearing.
(2) Both parties must agree to seek an advisory opinion and so notify the chairperson. The procedure for
requesting and issuing advisory opinions should be discussed with the DRB at the first meeting with
the parties.
(3) The DRB may or may not issue a written opinion, but if a written advisory opinion is issued, it must
be at the specific request of both parties.
(4) The opinion is only advisory and does not require an acceptance or rejection by either party. If the
dispute is not resolved and a hearing is held, the oral presentations and advisory opinion are
completely disregarded and the DRB hearing procedure is followed.
(5) Advisory opinions should be limited to merit issues only.
(d) Arranging a Dispute Review Board Hearing. When the Project Engineer initiates the DRB review process, the
Project Engineer will:
1. Contact the Contractor and the DRB to coordinate an acceptable hearing date and time. The hearing
shall be held at the Resident Engineer’s office unless an alternative location is agreed to by both parties.
Unless otherwise agreed to by both parties the DRB hearing will be held within 30 days after the DRB
agreement is signed by the CDOT Chief Engineer.
2. Ensure DRB members have copies of all documents previously prepared by the Contractor and CDOT
pertaining to the dispute, the DRB request, the Contract documents, and the special provisions at least
two weeks before the hearing.
(e) Pre-Hearing Submittal: At least fifteen days prior to the hearing, CDOT and the Contractor shall submit by e-
mail to the DRB Chairperson their parties pre-hearing position paper. The DRB Chairperson shall
simultaneously distribute by e-mail the pre-hearing position papers to all parties and other DRB members, if
any. At the same time, each party shall submit a copy of all its supporting documents to be used at the
hearing to all DRB Members and the other party unless the parties have agreed to a common set of
documents as discussed in #2 below. In this case, CDOT shall submit the common set of documents to the
Board and the Contractor. The pre-hearing position paper shall contain the following:
1. A joint statement of the dispute, and the scope of the desired decision. The joint statement shall
summarize in a few sentences the nature of the dispute. If the parties are unable to agree on the wording
of the joint statement, each party’s position paper shall contain both statements, and identify the party
authoring each statement. The parties shall agree upon a joint statement at least 20 days prior to the
hearing and submit it to the DRB or each party’s independent statement shall be submitted to the DRB
and the other party at least 20 days prior to the hearing.
2. The basis and justification for the party’s position, with reference to specific contract language and other
supporting documents for each element of the dispute. To minimize duplication and repetitiveness, the
parties may identify a common set of documents that will be referred to by both parties and submit them
in a separate package to the DRB. The engineer will provide a hard copy of the project plans and Project
January 31, 2013
6
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
and Standard Special Provisions, if necessary, to the DRB. Other standard CDOT documents such as
Standard Specifications and M&S Standards are available on the CDOT website.
(1) If any party contends that they are not necessary to the proceedings, the DRB shall determine that
issue in the first instance. Should the DRB determine that a dispute does not involve a party, that
party shall be relieved from participating in the DRB hearing and paying any further DRB costs.
(2) When the scope of the hearing includes quantum, the requesting party's position paper shall include
full cost details, calculated in accordance with methods set forth in subsection 105.24(b)12. The
Scope of the hearing will not include quantum if CDOT has ordered an audit and that audit has not
been completed.
3. A list of proposed attendees at the hearing. In the event of any disagreement, the DRB shall make the
final determination as to who attends the hearing.
4. A list of any intended experts including their qualifications and a summary of what their presentation will
include and an estimate of the length of the presentation.
The number of copies, distribution requirements, and time for submittal shall be established by the DRB
and communicated to the parties by the Chairperson.
A pre-hearing phone conference with all DRB members and the parties shall be conducted as soon as a
hearing date is established but no later than 10 days prior to the hearing. The DRB Chairperson shall
explain the specifics of how the hearing will be conducted including how the two parties will present their
information to the DRB (Ex: Each party makes a full presentation of their position or presentations will be
made on a “point by point” basis with each party making a presentation only on an individual dispute issue
before moving onto to the next issue). If the pre-hearing position papers and documents have been
received by the Board prior to the conference call, the DRB Chairperson shall at this conference discuss
the estimated hours of review and research activities for this dispute (such as time spent evaluating and
preparing recommendations on specific issues presented to the DRB). If the pre-hearing position papers
and documents have not been received by the Board prior to the conference call, another conference call
will be scheduled during the initial conference call to discuss the estimated hours of review. Compensation
for time agreed to in advance by the parties will be made at an agreed rate of $125 per hour in accordance
with subsection 105.23 (k) 2. Compensation for the phone conference time will also be made at an agreed
to rate of $125 per hour in accordance with subsection 105.23 (k) 2. The Engineer shall coordinate the
phone conference.
(f) Dispute Review Board Hearing. The DRB shall preside over a hearing. The chairperson shall control the
hearing and conduct it as follows:
1. An employee of CDOT presents a brief description of the project and the status of construction on the
project.
2. The party that requested the DRB presents the dispute in detail as supported by previously submitted
information and documentation in the pre-hearing position paper. No new information or disputes will be
heard or addressed by the DRB.
3. The other party presents its position in detail as supported by previously submitted information and
documentation in the pre-hearing position paper. No new information or disputes will be heard or
addressed by the DRB.
4. Employees of each party are responsible for leading presentations at the DRB hearing.
5. Attorneys shall not participate in the hearing unless the DRB specifically addresses an issue to them or
unless agreed to by both parties. Should the parties disagree on attorney participation, the DRB shall
decide on what, if any, participation will be permitted. Attorneys representing the parties are permitted to
attend the hearing, provided their presence has been noted in the pre-hearing submittal.
6. Either party may use experts. A party intending to offer an outside expert's analysis at the hearing shall
January 31, 2013
7
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
disclose such intention in the pre-hearing position paper. The expert's name and a general statement of
the area of the dispute that will be covered by his presentation shall be included in the disclosure. The
other party may present an outside expert to address or respond to those issues that may be raised by
the disclosing party's outside expert.
7. If both parties approve, the DRB may retain an outside expert. The DRB chairperson shall include the
cost of the outside expert in the DRB's regular invoice. CDOT and the Contractor shall equally bear the
cost of the services of the outside expert employed by the DRB.
8. Upon completion of their presentations and rebuttals, both parties and the DRB will be provided the
opportunity to exchange questions and answers. All questions shall be directed to the chairperson first.
Attendees may respond only when board members request a response.
9. The DRB shall hear only those disputes identified in the written request for the DRB and the information
contained in the pre-hearing submittals. The board shall not hear or address other disputes. If either
party attempts to discuss a dispute other than those to be heard by the DRB or attempts to submit new
information, the chairperson shall inform such party that the board shall not hear the issue and shall not
accept any additional information. The DRB shall not hear any issue or consider any information that was
not contained in the Request for Equitable Adjustment and fully submitted to the Project Engineer and
Resident Engineer during the 105.22 process.
10. If either party fails to timely deliver a position paper, the DRB may reschedule the hearing one time. On
the final date and time established for the hearing, the DRB shall proceed with the hearing using the
information that has been submitted.
11. If a party fails to appear at the hearing, the DRB shall proceed as if all parties were in attendance.
(g) Dispute Review Board Recommendation. The DRB shall issue a Recommendation in accordance with the
following procedures:
1. The DRB shall not make a recommendation on the dispute at the meeting. Prior to the closure of the
hearing, the DRB members and the Contractor and CDOT together will discuss the time needed for
analysis and review of the dispute and the issuance of the DRB's recommendation. The maximum time
shall be 30 days unless otherwise agreed to by both parties. At a minimum, the recommendation shall
contain all the elements listed in Rule 35, Form of Award, of the Arbitration Regular Track Provisions
listed at the end of subsection 105.24.
2. After the meeting has been closed, the DRB shall prepare a written Recommendation signed by each
member of the DRB. In the case of a three member DRB, where one member dissents that member shall
prepare a written dissent and sign it.
3. The chairperson shall transmit the signed Recommendation and any supporting documents to both
parties.
(h) Clarification and Reconsideration of Recommendation. Either party may request clarification or
reconsideration of a decision within ten days following receipt of the Recommendation. Within ten days after
receiving the request, the DRB shall provide written clarification or reconsideration to both parties unless
otherwise agreed to by both parties.
Requests for clarification or reconsideration shall be submitted in writing simultaneously to the DRB and to the
other party.
The Board shall not accept requests for reconsideration that amount to a renewal of a prior argument or
additional argument based on facts available at the time of the hearing. The Board shall not consider any
documents or arguments which have not been made a part of the pre-hearing submittal other than
clarification and data supporting previously submitted documentation.
Only one request for clarification or reconsideration per dispute from each party will be allowed.
January 31, 2013
8
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
(i) Acceptance or Rejection of Recommendation. CDOT and the Contractor shall submit their written acceptance
or rejection of the Recommendation, in whole or in part, concurrently to the other party and to the DRB within
14 days after receipt of the Recommendation or following receipt of responses to requests for clarification or
reconsideration.
If the parties accept the Recommendation or a discreet part thereof, it will be implemented in accordance with
subsections 108.08, 109.04, 109.05, or 109.10 and the dispute is resolved.
If either party rejects the Recommendation in whole or in part, it shall give written explanation to the other
party within 14 days after receiving the Recommendation. When the Recommendation is rejected in whole or
in part by either party, the other party may either abandon the dispute or pursue a formal claim in accordance
with subsection 105.24.
If either party fails to submit its written acceptance or rejection of the Dispute Board’s recommendation,
according to these specifications, such failure shall constitute that party’s acceptance of the Board’s
recommendation.
(j) Admissibility of Recommendation. Recommendations of a DRB issued in accordance with subsection 105.23
are admissible in subsequent proceedings but shall be prefaced with the following paragraph:
This Recommendation may be taken under consideration with the understanding that:
1. The DRB Recommendation was a proceeding based on presentations by the parties.
2. No fact or expert witnesses presented sworn testimony or were subject to cross-examination.
3. The parties to the DRB were not provided with the right to any discovery, such as production of
documents or depositions.
4. There is no record of the DRB hearing other than the Recommendation.
(k) Cost and Payments.
1. General Administrative Costs. The Contractor and the Department shall equally share the entire cost of
the following to support the Board's operation:
(1) Copies of Contract and other relevant documentation
(2) Meeting space and facilities
(3) Secretarial Services
(4) Telephone
(5) Mail
(6) Reproduction
(7) Filing
2. The Department and the Contractor shall bear the costs and expenses of the DRB equally. Each DRB
board member shall be compensated at an agreed rate of $1,200 per day if time spent on-site per
meeting is greater than four hours. Each DRB board member shall be compensated at an agreed rate of
$800 per day if time spent on-site per meeting is less than or equal to four hours. The time spent
traveling to and from each meeting shall be reimbursed at $50 per hour if the travel distance is more than
50 miles. The agreed daily and travel time rates shall be considered full compensation for on-site time,
travel expenses, transportation, lodging, time for travel of more than 50 miles and incidentals for each
day, or portion thereof that the DRB member is at an authorized DRB meeting. No additional
compensation will be made for time spent by DRB members in review and research activities outside the
official DRB meetings unless that time, (such as time spent evaluating and preparing recommendations
on specific issues presented to the DRB), has been specifically agreed to in advance by the Department
and Contractor. Time away from the project that has been specifically agreed to in advance by the
parties will be compensated at an agreed rate of $125 per hour. The agreed amount of $125 per hour
shall include all incidentals. Members serving on more than one DRB, regardless of the number of
January 31, 2013
9
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
meetings per day, shall not be paid more than the all inclusive rate per day or rate per hour for an
individual project.
3. Payments to Board Members and General Administrative Costs. Each Board member shall submit an
invoice to the Contractor for fees and applicable expenses incurred each month following a month in
which the Board members participated in Board functions. Such invoices shall be in the format
established by the Contractor and the Department. The Contractor shall submit to the Department copies
of all invoices. No markups by the Contractor will be allowed on any DRB costs. The Department will
split the cost by authorizing 50 percent payment on the next progress payment. The Contractor shall
make all payments in full to Board members within seven calendar days after receiving payment from the
Department for this work.
(l) Dispute Review Board Three Party Agreement.
DISPUTE REVIEW BOARD
THREE PARTY AGREEMENT
COLORADO PROJECT NO.
THIS THREE PARTY AGREEMENT, made as of the date signed by the Chief Engineer below, by and between:
the Colorado Department of Transportation, hereinafter called the “Department”; and
hereinafter called the “Contractor”; and
,
,
,
,
and
hereinafter called the “Dispute Review Board” or “Board”.
,
WHEREAS, the Department is now engaged in the construction of the
[Project Name]
and
WHEREAS, the Contract provides for the establishment of a Board in accordance with subsections 105.22 and
105.23 of the specifications.
NOW, THEREFORE, it is hereby agreed:
ARTICLE I
DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND SERVICES
The Department and the Contractor shall form a Board in accordance with this agreement and the provisions of
subsection 105.23.
ARTICLE II
COMMITMENT ON PART OF THE PARTIES HERETO
The parties hereto shall faithfully fulfill the requirements of subsection 105.23 and the requirements of this
agreement.
January 31, 2013
10
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
ARTICLE III
COMPENSATION
The parties shall share equally in the cost of the Board, including general administrative costs (meeting space and
facilities, secretarial services, telephone, mail, reproduction, filing) and the member’s individual fees.
Reimbursement of the Contractor’s share of the Board expenses for any reason is prohibited.
The Contractor shall make all payments in full to Board members. The Contractor will submit to the Department
an itemized statement for all such payments, and the Department will split the cost by including 50 percent
payment on the next progress payment. The Contractor and the Department will agree to accept invoiced costs
prior to payment by the Contractor.
DISPUTE REVIEW BOARD
THREE PARTY AGREEMENT PAGE 2
COLORADO PROJECT NO.
Board members shall keep all fee records pertaining to this agreement available for inspection by representatives
of the Department and the Contractor for a period of three years after the termination of the Board members’
services.
Payment to each Board member shall be at the fee rates established in subsection 105.23 and agreed to by each
Board member, the Contractor, and the Department. In addition, reimbursement will be made for applicable
expenses.
Each Board member shall submit an invoice to the Contractor for fees incurred each month following a month in
which the members participated in Board functions. Such invoices shall be in the format established by the
Contractor and the Department.
Payments shall be made to each Board member within 60 days after the Contractor and Department have
received all the applicable billing data and verified the data submitted by that member. The Contractor shall make
payment to the Board member within seven calendar days of receipt of payment from the Department.
ARTICLE IV
ASSIGNMENT
Board members shall not assign any of the work to be performed by them under this agreement. Board members
shall disclose any conflicts of interest including but not limited to any dealings with the either party in the previous
five years other than serving as a Board member under other contracts.
ARTICLE V
COMMENCEMENT AND TERMINATION OF SERVICES
The commencement of the services of the Board shall be in accordance with subsection 105.23 of the
specifications and shall continue until all assigned disputes under the Contract which may require the Board’s
services have been heard and a Recommendation has been issued by the Board as specified in subsection
105.23. If a Board member is unable to fulfill his responsibilities for reasons specified in subsection 105.23(b)7, he
shall be replaced as provided therein, and the Board shall fulfill its responsibilities as though there had been no
change.
ARTICLE VI
LEGAL RELATIONS
January 31, 2013
11
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
The parties hereto mutually agree that each Board member in performance of his duties on the Board is acting as
an independent contractor and not as an employee of either the Department or the Contractor. Board members
will guard their independence and avoid any communication about the substance of the dispute without both
parties being present.
The Board members are absolved of any personal liability arising from the Recommendations of the Board. The
parties agree that members of the dispute review board panel are acting as mediators for purposes of C.R.S. §
13-22-302(4) and, as such, the liability of any dispute review board member shall be limited to willful and wanton
misconduct as provided for in C.R.S. § 13-22-305(6)
DISPUTE REVIEW BOARD
THREE PARTY AGREEMENT PAGE 3
COLORADO PROJECT NO.
IN WITNESS HEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this agreement to be executed the day and year first
written above.
BOARD MEMBER:
.
BY:
.
BOARD MEMBER:
.
BY:
.
BOARD MEMBER:
.
BY:
.
CONTRACTOR:
.
BY:
TITLE:
.
COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
BY:
TITLE: CHIEF ENGINEER
Date: .
105.24 Claims for Unresolved Disputes. The Contractor may file a claim only if the disputes resolution process
described in subsections 105.22 and 105.23 has been exhausted without resolution of the dispute. Other
methods of nonbinding dispute resolution, exclusive of arbitration and litigation, can be used if agreed to by both
parties.
This subsection applies to any unresolved dispute or set of disputes between CDOT and the Contractor with an
aggregate value of more than $15,000. Unresolved disputes with an aggregate value of more than $15,000 from
subcontractors, materials suppliers or any other entity not a party to the Contract shall be submitted through the
Contractor in accordance with this subsection as a pass-through claim. Review of a pass-through claim does not
create privity of Contract between CDOT and any other entity.
Subsections 105.22, 105.23 and 105.24 provide both contractual alternative dispute resolution processes and
constitute remedy-granting provisions pursuant to Colorado Revised Statutes which must be exhausted in their
entirety.
January 31, 2013
12
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
Merit-binding arbitration or litigation proceedings must commence within 180-calendar days of the Chief
Engineer's decision, absent written agreement otherwise by both parties.
The venue for all unresolved disputes with an aggregate value $15,000 or less shall be the County Court for the
City and County of Denver.
Non-binding Forms of alternative dispute resolution such as Mediation are available upon mutual agreement of
the parties for all claims submitted in accordance with this subsection.
The cost of the non-binding ADR process shall be shared equally by both parties with each party bearing its own
preparation costs. The type of nonbinding ADR process shall be agreed upon by the parties and shall be
conducted within the State of Colorado at a mutually acceptable location. Participation in a nonbinding ADR
process does not in any way waive the requirement that merit-binding arbitration or litigation proceedings must
commence within 180-calendar days of the Chief Engineer's decision, absent written agreement otherwise by
both parties.
(a) Notice of Intent to File a Claim.
Within 30 days after rejection of the Dispute Resolution Board's Recommendation issued in accordance with
subsection 105.23, the Contractor shall provide the Region Transportation Director with a written notice of
intent to file a claim. The Contractor shall also send a copy of this notice to the Resident Engineer. For the
purpose of this subsection Region Transportation Director shall mean the Region Transportation Director or
the Region Transportation Director's designated representative. CDOT will acknowledge in writing receipt of
Notice of Intent within 7 days.
(b) Claim Package Submission. Within 60 days after submitting the notice of intent to file a claim, the Contractor
shall submit five copies of a complete claim package representing the final position the Contractor wishes to
have considered. All claims shall be in writing and in sufficient detail to enable the RTD to ascertain the basis
and amount of claim. The claim package shall include all documents supporting the claim, regardless of
whether such documents were provided previously to CDOT.
If requested by the Contractor the 60 day period may be extended by the RTD in writing prior to final
acceptance. As a minimum, the following information shall accompany each claim.
1. A claim certification containing the following language, as appropriate:
A. For a direct claim by the Contractor:
CONTRACTOR'S CLAIM CERTIFICATION
Under penalty of law for perjury or falsification, the undersigned, (name) ,
(title) , of (company)
$ for extra compensation and Days additional time, made herein for work on this
contract is true to the best of my knowledge and belief and supported under the Contract between the parties.
, hereby certifies that the claim of
This claim package contains all available documents that support the claims made herein and I understand that
no additional information, other than for clarification and data supporting previously submitted documentation,
may be presented by me.
Dated /s/
Subscribed and sworn before me this day of .
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires: _______________________
B. For a pass-through claim:
PASS-THROUGH CLAIM CERTIFICATION
January 31, 2013
13
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
Under penalty of law for perjury or falsification, the undersigned, (name) ,
(title) , of (company)
$ for extra compensation and Days additional time, made herein for work on this
Project is true to the best of my knowledge and belief and supported under the contract between the parties.
, hereby certifies that the claim of
This claim package contains all available documents that support the claims made herein and I understand that
no additional information, other than for clarification and data supporting previously submitted documentation,
may be presented by me.
Dated /s/
Subscribed and sworn before me this day of .
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires: _______________________
Dated /s
The Contractor certifies that the claim being passed through to CDOT is passed through in good faith and is
accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge and belief.
Dated /s/
Subscribed and sworn before me this day of .
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires: _______________________
2. A detailed factual statement of the claim for additional compensation, time, or both, providing all
necessary dates, locations, and items of work affected by the claim. The Contractor's detailed factual
statement shall expressly describe the basis of the claim and factual evidence supporting the claim. This
requirement is not satisfied by simply incorporating into the claim package other documents that describe
the basis of the claim and supporting factual evidence.
3. The date on which facts were discovered which gave rise to the claim.
4. The name, title, and activity of all known CDOT, Consultant, and other individuals who may be
knowledgeable about facts giving rise to such claim.
5. The name, title, and activity of all known Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and other individuals who
may be knowledgeable about facts giving rise to such claim.
6. The specific provisions of the Contract, which support the claim and a statement of the reasons why such
provisions support the claim.
7. If the claim relates to a decision of the Project Engineer, which the Contract leaves to the Project
Engineer's discretion, the Contractor shall set out in detail all facts supporting its position relating to the
decision of the Project Engineer.
8. The identification of any documents and the substance of all oral communications that support the claim.
9. Copies of all known documents that support the claim.
10. The Dispute Review Board Recommendation.
11. If an extension of contract time is sought, the documents required by subsection 108.08(d).
12. If additional compensation is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the
following categories:
A. These categories represent the only costs that are recoverable by the Contractor. All other costs or
categories of costs are not recoverable:
(1) Actual wages and benefits, including FICA, paid for additional labor
(2) Costs for additional bond, insurance and tax
January 31, 2013
14
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
(3) Increased costs for materials
(4) Equipment costs calculated in accordance with subsection 109.04(c) for Contractor owned
equipment and based on certified invoice costs for rented equipment
(5) Costs of extended job site overhead
(6) Salaried employees assigned to the project
(7) Claims from subcontractors and suppliers at any level (the same level of detail as specified herein
is required for all such claims)
(8) An additional 16 percent will be added to the total of items (1) through (7) as compensation for
items for which no specific allowance is provided, including profit and home office overhead.
(9) Interest shall be paid in accordance with CRS 5-12-102 beginning from the date of the Notice of
Intent to File Claim
B. In adjustment for the costs as allowed above, the Department will have no liability for the following
items of damages or expense:
(1) Profit in excess of that provided in 12.A.(8) above
(2) Loss of Profit
(3) Additional cost of labor inefficiencies in excess of that provided in A. above
(4) Home office overhead in excess of that provided in A. above
(5) Consequential damages, including but not limited to loss of bonding capacity, loss of bidding
opportunities, and insolvency
(6) Indirect costs or expenses of any nature in excess of that provided in A. above
(7) Attorney’s fees, claim preparation fees, and expert fees
(c) Audit. An audit may be performed by the Department for any dispute or claim, and is mandatory for all
disputes and claims with amounts greater than $250,000. All audits will be complete within 60 days of receipt
of the complete claim package, provided the Contractor allows the auditors reasonable and timely access to
the Contractor's books and records. For all claims with amounts greater than $250,000 the Contractor shall
submit a copy of certified claim package directly to the CDOT Audit Unit at the following address:
Division of Audit
4201 E. Arkansas Ave
Denver, Co. 80222
(d) Region Transportation Director Decision. When the Contractor properly files a claim, the RTD will review the
claim and render a written decision to the Contractor to either affirm or deny the claim, in whole or in part, in
accordance with the following procedure.
The RTD may consolidate all related claims on a project and issue one decision, provided that consolidation
does not extend the time period within which the RTD is to render a decision. Consolidation of unrelated
claims will not be made.
The RTD will render a written decision to the Contractor within 60 days after the receipt of the claim package
or receipt of the audit whichever is later. In rendering the decision, the RTD: (1) will review the information in
the Contractor's claim; (2) will conduct a hearing if requested by either party; and (3) may consider any other
information available in rendering a decision.
The RTD will assemble and maintain a claim record comprised of all information physically submitted by the
Contractor in support of the claim and all other discoverable information considered by the RTD in reaching a
decision. Once the RTD assembles the claim record, the submission and consideration of additional
information, other than for clarification and data supporting previously submitted documentation, at any
subsequent level of review by anyone, will not be permitted.
The RTD will provide a copy of the claim record and the written decision to the Contractor describing the
information considered by the RTD in reaching a decision and the basis for that decision. If the RTD fails to
render a written decision within the 60 day period, or within any extended time period as agreed to by both
parties, the Contractor shall either: (1) accept this as a denial of the claim, or (2) appeal the claim to the Chief
January 31, 2013
15
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
Engineer, as described in this subsection.
If the Contractor accepts the RTD decision, the provisions of the decision shall be implemented in accordance
with subsections 108.08, 109.04, 109.05, or 109.10 and the claim is resolved.
If the Contractor disagrees with the RTD decision, the Contractor shall either: (1) accept the RTD decision as
final, or (2) file a written appeal to the Chief Engineer within 30 days from the receipt of the RTD decision. The
Contractor hereby agrees that if a written appeal is not properly filed, the RTD decision is final.
(e) Chief Engineer Decision. When a claim is appealed, the RTD will provide the claim record to the Chief
Engineer. Within 15 days of the appeal either party may submit a written request for a hearing with the Chief
Engineer or duly authorized Headquarters delegates. The Chief Engineer or a duly authorized Headquarters
delegate will review the claim and render a decision to affirm, overrule, or modify the RTD decision in
accordance with the following.
The Contractor's written appeal to the Chief Engineer will be made a part of the claim record.
The Chief Engineer will render a written decision within 60 days after receiving the written appeal. The Chief
Engineer will not consider any information that was not previously made a part of the claim record, other than
clarification and data supporting previously submitted documentation.
The Contractor shall have 30 days to accept or reject the Chief Engineer's decision. The Contractor shall
notify the Chief Engineer of its acceptance or rejection in writing.
If the Contractor accepts the Chief Engineer's decision, the provisions of the decision will be implemented in
accordance with subsections 108.08, 109.04, 109.05, or 109.10 and the claim is resolved.
If the Contractor disagrees with the Chief Engineer's decision, the Contractor shall either (1) pursue an
alternative dispute resolution process in accordance with this specification or (2) initiate litigation or merit
binding arbitration in accordance with subsection 105.24(f).
If the Chief Engineer does not issue a decision as required, the Contractor may immediately initiate either
litigation or merit binding arbitration in accordance with subsection 105.24(f).
For the convenience of the parties to the Contract it is mutually agreed by the parties that any merit binding
arbitration or De Novo litigation shall be brought within 180-calendar days from the date of the Chief
Engineer's decision. The parties understand and agree that the Contractor's failure to bring suit within the
time period provided, shall be a complete bar to any such claims or causes of action.
(f) De Novo Litigation or Merit Binding Arbitration. If the Contractor disagrees with the Chief Engineer's decision,
the Contractor may initiate de novo litigation or merit binding arbitration to finally resolve the claim that the
Contractor submitted to CDOT, depending on which option was selected by the Contractor on Form 1378
which shall be submitted at the preconstruction conference. Such litigation or arbitration shall be strictly
limited to those claims that were previously submitted and decided in the contractual dispute and claims
processes outlined herein. This does not preclude the joining in one litigation or arbitration of multiple claims
from the same project provided that each claim has gone through the dispute and claim process specified in
subsections 105.22 through 105.24. The parties may agree, in writing, at any time, to pursue some other
form of alternative dispute resolution.
Any offer made by the Contractor or the Department at any stage of the claims process, as set forth in this
subsection, shall be deemed an offer of settlement pursuant to Colorado Rule of Evidence 408 and therefore
inadmissible in any litigation or arbitration.
If the Contractor selected litigation, then de novo litigation shall proceed in accordance with the Colorado
Rules of Civil Procedure and the proper venue is the Colorado State District Court in and for the City and
County of Denver, unless both parties agree to the use of arbitration.
January 31, 2013
16
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
If the Contractor selected merit binding arbitration, or if both parties subsequently agreed to merit binding
arbitration, arbitration shall be governed by the modified version of AAA’s Construction Industry Arbitration
Rules which follow. Pursuant to the modified arbitration rules (R35 through R39), the arbitrators shall issue a
binding decision with regard to entitlement and a non-binding decision with regard to quantum. If either party
disagrees with the decision on quantum, the disagreeing party may seek a trial de novo in Denver District
Court with regard to quantum only.
January 31, 2013
17
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
AMERICAN ARBITRATION ASSOCIATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ARBITRATION RULES MODIFIED
FOR USE WITH CDOT SPECIFICATION SUBSECTION 105.24
R-1. Agreement of Parties
REGULAR TRACK PROCEDURES
(a) The parties shall be deemed to have made these rules a part of their Contract. These rules and any
amendments shall apply in the form in effect at the time the administrative requirements are met for a demand
for arbitration. The parties, by written agreement, may vary the procedures set forth in these rules. After
appointment of the arbitrator, such modifications may be made only with the consent of the arbitrator.
(b) Unless the parties determine otherwise, the Fast Track Procedures shall apply in any case in which
aggregate claims do not exceed $75,000, exclusive of interest and arbitration fees and costs. Parties may
also agree to use these procedures in larger cases. Unless the parties agree otherwise, these procedures will
not apply in cases involving more than two parties except for pass-through claims. The Fast Track
Procedures shall be applied as described in Sections F-1 through F-13 of these rules, in addition to any other
portion of these rules that is not in conflict with the Fast Track Procedures.
(c) Unless the parties agree otherwise, the Procedures for Large, Complex Construction Disputes shall apply to
all cases in which the disclosed aggregate claims of any party is at least $500,000, exclusive of claimed
interest, arbitration fees and costs. Parties may also agree to use these procedures in cases involving claims
under $500,000, or in nonmonetary cases. The Procedures for Large, Complex Construction Disputes shall
be applied as described in Sections L-1 through L-4 of these rules, in addition to any other portion of these
rules that is not in conflict with the Procedures for Large, Complex Construction Disputes.
(d) All other cases shall be administered in accordance with Sections R-1 through R-45 of these rules.
R-2. Independent Arbitration Provider and Delegation of Duties
When parties agree to arbitrate under these rules, or when they provide for arbitration by an independent third-
party (Arbitration Provider) and arbitration is initiated under these rules, they thereby authorize the Arbitration
Provider to administer the arbitration. The authority and duties of the Arbitration Provider are prescribed in the
parties’ Contract and in these rules, and may be carried out through such of the Arbitration Provider’s
representatives as it may direct. The Arbitration Provider will assign the administration of an arbitration to its
Denver office
R-3. Initiation of Arbitration
Arbitration shall be initiated in the following manner.
(a) The Contractor shall, within 30 days after the Chief Engineer issues a decision, submit to the Chief Engineer
written notice of its intention to arbitrate (the "demand"). The demand shall indicate the appropriate
qualifications for the arbitrator(s) to be appointed to hear the arbitration.
(b) CDOT may file an answering statement with the Contractor within 15 days after receiving the demand. If a
counterclaim is asserted, it shall contain a statement setting forth the nature of the counterclaim, the amount
involved, if any, and the remedy sought.
(c) The Chief Engineer shall retain an Arbitration Provider, such as the American Arbitration Association, which
will administer an arbitration pursuant to these Rules, except to the extent that such rules conflict with the
January 31, 2013
18
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
specifications, in which case the specifications shall control.
(d) The Arbitration Provider shall confirm its retention to the parties.
R-4. Consolidation or Joinder
If the parties' agreement or the law provides for consolidation or joinder of related arbitrations, all involved parties
will endeavor to agree on a process to effectuate the consolidation or joinder.
If they are unable to agree, the Arbitration Provider shall directly appoint a single arbitrator for the limited purpose
of deciding whether related arbitrations should be consolidated or joined and, if so, establishing a fair and
appropriate process for consolidation or joinder. The Arbitration Provider may take reasonable administrative
action to accomplish the consolidation or joinder as directed by the arbitrator.
R-5. Appointment of Arbitrator
An arbitrator shall be appointed in the following manner:
(a) Immediately after the Arbitration Provider is retained, the Arbitration Provider shall send simultaneously to
each party to the dispute an identical list of 10 names of potential arbitrators. The parties are encouraged to
agree to an arbitrator from the submitted list and to advise the AAA of their agreement. Absent agreement of
the parties, the arbitrator shall not have served as the mediator in the mediation phase of the instant
proceeding.
(b) If the parties cannot agree to arbitrator(s), each party to the dispute shall have 15 calendar days from the
transmittal date in which to strike names objected to, number the remaining names in order of preference, and
return the list to the Arbitration Provider. If a party does not return the list within the time specified, all persons
named therein shall be deemed acceptable. From among the persons who have been approved on both lists,
and in accordance with the designated order of mutual preference, the Arbitration Provider shall invite an
arbitrator to serve.
(c) Unless both parties agree otherwise one arbitrator shall be used for claims less than $250,000 and three
arbitrators shall be used for claims $250,000 and greater. Within 15 calendar days from the date of the
appointment of the last arbitrator, the Arbitration Provider shall appoint a chairperson.
(d) The entire claim record will be made available to the arbitrators by the Chief Engineer within 15 calendar days
from the date of the appointment of the last arbitrator.
R-6. Changes of Claim
The arbitrator(s) will not consider any information that was not previously made a part of the claim record as
transmitted by the Chief Engineer, other than clarification and data supporting previously submitted
documentation.
R-7. Disclosure
(a) Any person appointed or to be appointed as an arbitrator shall disclose to the Arbitration Provider any
circumstance likely to give rise to justifiable doubt as to the arbitrator's impartiality or independence, including
any bias or any interest in the result of the arbitration or any relationship with the parties or their
representatives. Such obligation shall remain in effect throughout the arbitration.
(b) Upon receipt of such information from the arbitrator or another source, the Arbitration Provider shall
communicate the information to the parties and, if it deems it appropriate to do so, to the arbitrator and others.
January 31, 2013
19
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
(c) In order to encourage disclosure by arbitrators, disclosure of information pursuant to this Section R-6 is not to
be construed as an indication that the arbitrator considers that the disclosed circumstances are likely to affect
impartiality or independence.
(d) In no case shall an arbitrator be employed by, affiliated with, or have consultive or business connection with
the claimant Contractor or CDOT. An arbitrator shall not have assisted either in the evaluation, preparation, or
presentation of the claim case either for the Contractor or the Department or have rendered an opinion on the
merits of the claim for either party, and shall not do so during the proceedings of arbitration.
R-8. Disqualification of Arbitrator
(a) Any arbitrator shall be impartial and independent and shall perform his or her duties with diligence and in
good faith, and shall be subject to disqualification for: (i) partiality or lack of independence, (ii) inability or
refusal to perform his or her duties with diligence and in good faith; and/or (iii) any grounds for disqualification
provided by applicable law.
(b) Upon objection of a party to the continued service of an arbitrator, or on its own initiative, the Arbitration
Provider shall determine whether the arbitrator should be disqualified under the grounds set out above, and
shall inform the parties of its decision, which decision shall be conclusive.
R-9. Communication with Arbitrator
No party and no one acting on behalf of any party shall communicate ex parte with an arbitrator or a candidate for
arbitrator concerning the arbitration.
R-10. Vacancies
(a) If for any reason an arbitrator is unable to perform the duties of the office, the Arbitration Provider may, on
proof satisfactory to it, declare the office vacant. Vacancies shall be filled in accordance with the applicable
provisions of these rules.
(b) In the event of a vacancy in a panel of neutral arbitrators after the hearings have commenced, the remaining
arbitrator or arbitrators may continue with the hearing and determination of the controversy, unless the parties
agree otherwise.
(c) In the event of the appointment of a substitute arbitrator, the panel of arbitrators shall determine in its sole
discretion whether it is necessary to repeat all or part of any prior hearings.
R-11. Jurisdiction
(a) The arbitrator shall have the power to rule on his or her own jurisdiction, including any objections with respect
to the existence, scope or validity of the arbitration agreement.
(b) The arbitrator shall have the power to determine the existence or validity of a contract of which an arbitration
clause forms a part. Such an arbitration clause shall be treated as an agreement independent of the other
terms of the contract. A decision by the arbitrator that the contract is null and void shall not for that reason
alone render invalid the arbitration clause.
(c) A party must object to the jurisdiction of the arbitrator or to the arbitrability of a claim or counterclaim no later
than 15 days after the Arbitration Provider confirms its retention to the parties. The arbitrator may rule on such
objections as a preliminary matter or as part of the final award.
R-12. Administrative Conference
January 31, 2013
20
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
At the request of any party or upon the Arbitration Provider’s own initiative, the Arbitration Provider may conduct
an administrative conference, in person or by telephone, with the parties and/or their representatives. The
conference may address such issues as arbitrator selection, potential exchange of information, a timetable for
hearings and any other administrative matters.
R-13. Preliminary Hearing
(a) At the request of any party or at the discretion of the arbitrator or the Arbitration Provider, the arbitrator may
schedule as soon as practicable a preliminary hearing with the parties and/or their representatives. The
preliminary hearing may be conducted by telephone at the arbitrator's discretion.
(b) During the preliminary hearing, the parties and the arbitrator should discuss the future conduct of the case,
including clarification of the issues and claims, a schedule for the hearings and any other preliminary matters.
R-14. Exchange of Information
(a) At the request of any party or at the discretion of the arbitrator, consistent with the expedited nature of
arbitration, the arbitrator may direct: (i) the production of documents and other information; (ii) short
depositions, particularly with regard to experts; and/or (iii) the identification of any witnesses to be called.
(b) At least five business days prior to the hearing, the parties shall exchange copies of all exhibits they intend to
submit at the hearing.
(c) The arbitrator is authorized to resolve any disputes concerning the exchange of information.
(d) Additional discovery may be ordered by the arbitrator in extraordinary cases when the demands of justice
require it.
R-15. Date, Time, and Place of Hearing
(a) The arbitrator shall set the date, time, and place for each hearing and/or conference. The parties shall
respond to requests for hearing dates in a timely manner, be cooperative in scheduling the earliest practicable
date, and adhere to the established hearing schedule.
(b) The parties may mutually agree on the locale where the arbitration is to be held. Absent such agreement, the
arbitration shall be held in the City and County of Denver.
(c) The Arbitration Provider shall send a notice of hearing to the parties at least ten calendar days in advance of
the hearing date, unless otherwise agreed by the parties.
R-16. Attendance at Hearings
The arbitrator and the Arbitration Provider shall maintain the privacy of the hearings unless the law provides to the
contrary. Any person having a direct interest in the arbitration is entitled to attend hearings. The arbitrator shall
otherwise have the power to require the exclusion of any witness, other than a party or other essential person,
during the testimony of any other witness. It shall be discretionary with the arbitrator to determine the propriety of
the attendance of any person other than a party and its representative.
R-17. Representation
Any party may be represented by counsel or other authorized representative. A party intending to be so
represented shall notify the other party and the Arbitration Provider of the name and address of the representative
at least three calendar days prior to the date set for the hearing at which that person is first to appear.
January 31, 2013
21
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
R-18. Oaths
Before proceeding with the first hearing, each arbitrator may take an oath of office and, if required by law, shall do
so. The arbitrator may require witnesses to testify under oath administered by any duly qualified person and, if it is
required by law or requested by any party, shall do so.
R-19. Stenographic Record
Any party desiring a stenographic record shall make arrangements directly with a stenographer and shall notify
the other parties of these arrangements at least three days in advance of the hearing. The requesting party or
parties shall pay the cost of the record. If the transcript is agreed by the parties, or determined by the arbitrator to
be the official record of the proceeding, it must be provided to the arbitrator and made available to the other
parties for inspection, at a date, time, and place determined by the arbitrator.
R-20. Interpreters
Any party wishing an interpreter shall make all arrangements directly with the interpreter and shall assume the
costs of the service.
R-21. Postponements
The arbitrator for good cause shown may postpone any hearing upon agreement of the parties, upon request of a
party, or upon the arbitrator's own initiative.
R-22. Arbitration in the Absence of a Party or Representative
Unless the law provides to the contrary, the arbitration may proceed in the absence of any party or representative
who, after due notice, fails to be present or fails to obtain a postponement. An award shall not be made solely on
the default of a party. The arbitrator shall require the party who is present to submit such evidence as the
arbitrator may require for the making of an award.
R-23. Conduct of Proceedings
(a) The Contractor shall present evidence to support its claim. CDOT shall then present evidence supporting its
defense. Witnesses for each party shall also submit to questions from the arbitrator and the adverse party.
The arbitrator has the discretion to vary this procedure; provided that the parties are treated with equality and
that each party has the right to be heard and is given a fair opportunity to present its case.
(b) The arbitrator, exercising his or her discretion, shall conduct the proceedings with a view to expediting the
resolution of the dispute and may direct the order of proof, bifurcate proceedings, and direct the parties to
focus their presentations on issues the decision of which could dispose of all or part of the case. The
arbitrator shall entertain motions, including motions that dispose of all or part of a claim or that may expedite
the proceedings, and may also make preliminary rulings and enter interlocutory orders.
(c) The parties may agree to waive oral hearings in any case.
R-24. Evidence
(a) The arbitrators shall consider all written information available in the claim record and all oral presentations in
support of that record by the Contractor and CDOT. Conformity to legal rules of evidence shall not be
necessary.
(b) The arbitrators shall not consider any written documents or arguments which have not previously been made
January 31, 2013
22
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
a part of the claim record, other than clarification and data supporting previously submitted documentation.
The arbitrators shall not consider an increase in the amount of the claim, or any new claims.
(c) The arbitrator shall determine the admissibility, relevance, and materiality of any evidence offered. The
arbitrator may request offers of proof and may reject evidence deemed by the arbitrator to be cumulative,
unreliable, unnecessary, or of slight value compared to the time and expense involved. All evidence shall be
taken in the presence of all of the arbitrators and all of the parties, except where: (i) any of the parties is
absent, in default, or has waived the right to be present, or (ii) the parties and the arbitrators agree otherwise.
(d) The arbitrator shall take into account applicable principles of legal privilege, such as those involving the
confidentiality of communications between a lawyer and client.
(e) An arbitrator or other person authorized by law to subpoena witnesses or documents may do so upon the
request of any party or independently.
R-25. Evidence by Affidavit and Post-hearing Filing of Documents or Other Evidence
(a) The arbitrator may receive and consider the evidence of witnesses by declaration or affidavit, but shall give it
only such weight as the arbitrator deems it entitled to after consideration of any objection made to its
admission.
(b) If the parties agree or the arbitrator directs that documents or other evidence be submitted to the arbitrator
after the hearing, the documents or other evidence, unless otherwise agreed by the parties and the arbitrator,
shall be filed with the Arbitration Provider for transmission to the arbitrator. All parties shall be afforded an
opportunity to examine and respond to such documents or other evidence.
R-26. Inspection or Investigation
An arbitrator finding it necessary to make an inspection or investigation in connection with the arbitration shall
direct the Arbitration Provider to so advise the parties. The arbitrator shall set the date and time and the
Arbitration Provider shall notify the parties. Any party who so desires may be present at such an inspection or
investigation. In the event that one or all parties are not present at the inspection or investigation, the arbitrator
shall make an oral or written report to the parties and afford them an opportunity to comment.
R-27. Interim Measures
(a) The arbitrator may take whatever interim measures he or she deems necessary, including injunctive relief and
measures for the protection or conservation of property and disposition of perishable goods.
(b) A request for interim measures addressed by a party to a judicial authority shall not be deemed incompatible
with the agreement to arbitrate or a waiver of the right to arbitrate.
R-28. Closing of Hearing
When satisfied that the presentation of the parties is complete, the arbitrator shall declare the hearing closed.
If documents or responses are to be filed as provided in Section R-24, or if briefs are to be filed, the hearing shall
be declared closed as of the final date set by the arbitrator for the receipt of documents, responses, or briefs. The
time limit within which the arbitrator is required to make the award shall commence to run, in the absence of other
agreements by the parties and the arbitrator, upon the closing of the hearing.
R-29. Reopening of Hearing
January 31, 2013
23
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
The hearing may be reopened on the arbitrator's initiative, or by direction of the arbitrator upon application of a
party, at any time before the award is made. If reopening the hearing would prevent the making of the award
within the specific time agreed to by the parties in the arbitration agreement, the matter may not be reopened
unless the parties agree to an extension of time. When no specific date is fixed by agreement of the parties, the
arbitrator shall have 15 calendar days from the closing of the reopened hearing within which to make an award.
R-30. Waiver of Rules
Any party who proceeds with the arbitration after knowledge that any provision or requirement of these rules has
not been complied with and who fails to state an objection in writing shall be deemed to have waived the right to
object.
R-31. Extensions of Time
The parties may modify any period of time by mutual agreement. The Arbitration Provider or the arbitrator may for
good cause extend any period of time established by these rules, except the time for making the award. The
Arbitration Provider shall notify the parties of any extension.
R-32. Serving of Notice
(a) Any papers, notices, or process necessary or proper for the initiation or continuation of an arbitration under
these rules; for any court action in connection therewith, or for the entry of judgment on any award made
under these rules, may be served on a party by mail addressed to the party or its representative at the last
known address or by personal service, in or outside the state where the arbitration is to be held, provided that
reasonable opportunity to be heard with regard thereto has been granted to the party.
(b) The Arbitration Provider, the arbitrator and the parties may also use overnight delivery, electronic facsimile
transmission (fax), or electronic mail (email) to give the notices required by these rules.
(c) Unless otherwise instructed by the Arbitration Provider or by the arbitrator, any documents submitted by any
party to the Arbitration Provider or to the arbitrator shall simultaneously be provided to the other party or
parties to the arbitration.
R-33. Majority Decision
When the panel consists of more than one arbitrator, unless required by law or by the arbitration agreement, a
majority of the arbitrators must make all decisions.
R-34. Time of Award
The award shall be made promptly by the arbitrator and, unless otherwise agreed by the parties or specified by
law, no later than 30 calendar days from the date of closing the hearing, or, if oral hearings have been waived,
from the date of the Arbitration Provider’s transmittal of the final statements and proofs to the arbitrator.
R-35. Form of Award
After complete review of the facts associated with the claim, the arbitrators shall render a written explanation of
their decision. When three arbitrators are used, and only two arbitrators agree then the award shall be signed by
the two arbitrators. The arbitrator's decision shall include:
(a) A summary of the issues and factual evidence presented by the Contractor and the Department concerning
the claim;
January 31, 2013
24
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
(b) Decisions concerning the validity of the claim;
(c) Decisions concerning the value of the claim as to cost impacts if the claim is determined to be valid;
(d) The contractual and factual bases supporting the decisions made including an explanation as to why each
and every position was accepted or rejected;
(e) Detailed and supportable calculations which support any decisions.
R-36. Scope of Award
(a) The arbitrator may grant any remedy or relief that the arbitrator deems just and equitable and within the scope
of the agreement of the parties, including, but not limited to, equitable relief and specific performance of a
contract.
(b) In addition to the final award, the arbitrator may make other decisions, including interim, interlocutory, or partial
rulings, orders, and awards. (c) The award of the arbitrator may include interest at the statutory rate and from
such date as the arbitrator may deem appropriate.
R-37. Delivery of Award to Parties
Parties shall accept as notice and delivery of the award the placing of the award or a true copy thereof in the mail
addressed to the parties or their representatives at the last known address, personal or electronic service of the
award, or the filing of the award in any other manner that is permitted by law.
R-38. Modification of Award
Within 10 calendar days after the transmittal of an award, the arbitrator on his or her initiative, or any party, upon
notice to the other parties, may request that the arbitrator correct any clerical, typographical, technical or
computational errors in the award. The arbitrator is not empowered to redetermine the merits of any claim already
decided.
If the modification request is made by a party, the other parties shall be given 10 calendar days to respond to the
request. The arbitrator shall dispose of the request within 25 calendar days after transmittal by the Arbitration
Provider to the arbitrator of the request.
If applicable law provides a different procedural time frame, that procedure shall be followed.
R-39. Appeal of Award
Appeal of the arbitrators’ decision concerning the merit of the claim is governed by the Colorado Uniform
Arbitration Act, C.R.S. §§ 13-22-202 to -230. Either party may appeal the arbitrator’s decision on the value of the
claim to the Colorado State District Court in and for the City and County of Denver for trial de novo.
R-40. Release of Documents for Judicial Proceedings
The Arbitration Provider shall, upon the written request of a party, furnish to the party, at its expense, certified
copies of any papers in the Arbitration Provider’s possession that may be required in judicial proceedings relating
to the arbitration.
R-41. Applications to Court and Exclusion of Liability
(a) No judicial proceeding by a party relating to the subject matter of the arbitration shall be deemed a waiver of
January 31, 2013
25
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
the party's right to arbitrate.
(b) Neither the Arbitration Provider nor any arbitrator in a proceeding under these rules is a necessary or proper
party in judicial proceedings relating to the arbitration.
(c) Parties to these rules shall be deemed to have consented that judgment upon the arbitration award may be
entered in any federal or state court having jurisdiction thereof.
(d) Parties to an arbitration under these rules shall be deemed to have consented that neither the Arbitration
Provider nor any arbitrator shall be liable to any party in any action for damages or injunctive relief for any act
or omission in connection with any arbitration under these rules.
R-42. Administrative Fees
The Arbitration Provider shall prescribe filing and other administrative fees and service charges to compensate it
for the cost of providing administrative services. The fees in effect when the fee or charge is incurred shall be
applicable. Such fees and charges shall be borne equally by the parties.
The Arbitration Provider may, in the event of extreme hardship on the part of any party, defer or reduce the
administrative fees.
R-43. Expenses
The expenses of witnesses for either side shall be paid by the party producing such witnesses. All other expenses
of the arbitration, including required travel and other expenses of the arbitrator, Arbitration Provider
representatives, and any witness and the cost of any proof produced at the direct request of the arbitrator, shall
be borne equally by the parties.
R-44. Neutral Arbitrator's Compensation
Arbitrators shall be compensated a rate consistent with the arbitrator's stated rate of compensation.
If there is disagreement concerning the terms of compensation, an appropriate rate shall be established with the
arbitrator by the Arbitration Provider and confirmed to the parties.
Such compensation shall be borne equally by the parties.
R-45. Deposits
The Arbitration Provider may require the parties to deposit in advance of any hearings such sums of money as it
deems necessary to cover the expense of the arbitration, including the arbitrator's fee, if any, and shall render an
accounting to the parties and return any unexpended balance at the conclusion of the case.
R-46. Interpretation and Application of Rules
The arbitrator shall interpret and apply these rules insofar as they relate to the arbitrator's powers and duties by a
majority vote. If that is not possible, either an arbitrator or a party may refer the question to the Arbitration
Provider for final decision. All other rules shall be interpreted and applied by the Arbitration Provider.
R-45. Suspension for Nonpayment
If arbitrator compensation or administrative charges have not been paid in full, the Arbitration Provider may so
January 31, 2013
26
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
inform the parties in order that the parties may advance the required payment. If such payments are not made,
the arbitrator may order the suspension or termination of the proceedings. If no arbitrator has yet been appointed,
the Arbitration Provider may suspend the proceedings.
F-1. Limitations on Extensions
FAST TRACK PROCEDURES
In the absence of extraordinary circumstances, the Arbitration Provider or the arbitrator may grant a party no more
than one seven-day extension of the time in which to respond to the demand for arbitration or counterclaim as
provided in Section R-3.
F-2. Changes of Claim
The arbitrator will not consider any information that was not previously made a part of the claim record as
transmitted by the Chief Engineer, other than clarification and data supporting previously submitted
documentation
F-3. Serving of Notice
In addition to notice provided above, the parties shall also accept notice by telephone. Telephonic notices by the
Arbitration Provider shall subsequently be confirmed in writing to the parties. Should there be a failure to confirm
in writing any such oral notice, the proceeding shall nevertheless be valid if notice has, in fact, been given by
telephone.
F-4. Appointment and Qualification of Arbitrator
Immediately after the retention of the Arbitration Provider, the Arbitration Provider will simultaneously submit to
each party a listing and biographical information from its panel of arbitrators knowledgeable in construction who
are available for service in Fast Track cases. The parties are encouraged to agree to an arbitrator from this list,
and to advise the Arbitration Provider of their agreement, or any factual objections to any of the listed arbitrators,
within 7 calendar days of the transmission of the list. The Arbitration Provider will appoint the agreed-upon
arbitrator, or in the event the parties cannot agree on an arbitrator, will designate the arbitrator from among those
names not stricken for factual objections.
The parties will be given notice by the Arbitration Provider of the appointment of the arbitrator, who shall be
subject to disqualification for the reasons specified above. Within the time period established by the Arbitration
Provider, the parties shall notify the Arbitration Provider of any objection to the arbitrator appointed. Any objection
by a party to the arbitrator shall be for cause and shall be confirmed in writing to the Arbitration Provider with a
copy to the other party or parties.
F-5. Preliminary Telephone Conference
Unless otherwise agreed by the parties and the arbitrator, as promptly as practicable after the appointment of the
arbitrator, a preliminary telephone conference shall be held among the parties or their attorneys or
representatives, and the arbitrator.
F-6. Exchange of Exhibits
At least 2 business days prior to the hearing, the parties shall exchange copies of all exhibits they intend to submit
at the hearing. The arbitrator is authorized to resolve any disputes concerning the exchange of exhibits.
F-7. Discovery
January 31, 2013
27
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
There shall be no discovery, except as provided in Section F-4 or as ordered by the arbitrator in extraordinary
cases when the demands of justice require it.
F-8. Date, Time, and Place of Hearing
The arbitrator shall set the date and time, and place of the hearing, to be scheduled to take place within 30
calendar days of confirmation of the arbitrator's appointment. The Arbitration Provider will notify the parties in
advance of the hearing date. All hearings shall be held within the City and County of Denver.
F-9. The Hearing
(a) Generally, the hearing shall not exceed 1 day. Each party shall have equal opportunity to submit its proofs
and complete its case. The arbitrator shall determine the order of the hearing, and may require further
submission of documents within two business days after the hearing. For good cause shown, the arbitrator
may schedule 1 additional hearing day within 7 business days after the initial day of hearing.
(b) Generally, there will be no stenographic record. Any party desiring a stenographic record may arrange for one
pursuant to the provisions above.
F-10. Time of Award
Unless otherwise agreed by the parties, the award shall be rendered not later than 14 calendar days from the
date of the closing of the hearing or, if oral hearings have been waived, from the date of the Arbitration Provider’s
transmittal of the final statements and proofs to the arbitrator.
F-11. Time Standards
The arbitration shall be completed by settlement or award within 60 calendar days of confirmation of the
arbitrator's appointment, unless all parties and the arbitrator agree otherwise or the arbitrator extends this time in
extraordinary cases when the demands of justice require it.
F-12. Arbitrator's Compensation
Arbitrators will receive compensation at a rate to be suggested by the Arbitration Provider regional office.
L-1. Large, Complex Construction Disputes
PROCEDURES FOR LARGE, COMPLEX CONSTRUCTION DISPUTES
The procedures for large, complex construction disputes shall apply to any claim with a value exceeding $500,000
or as agreed to by the parties.
L-2. Administrative Conference
Prior to the dissemination of a list of potential arbitrators, the Arbitration Provider shall, unless the parties agree
otherwise, conduct an administrative conference with the parties and/or their attorneys or other representatives by
conference call. The conference call will take place within 14 days after the retention of the Arbitration Provider. In
the event the parties are unable to agree on a mutually acceptable time for the conference, the Arbitration
Provider may contact the parties individually to discuss the issues contemplated herein. Such administrative
conference shall be conducted for the following purposes and for such additional purposed as the parties or the
Arbitration Provider may deem appropriate:
January 31, 2013
28
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
(a) To obtain additional information about the nature and magnitude of the dispute and the anticipated length of
hearing and scheduling;
(b) To discuss the views of the parties about the technical and other qualifications of the arbitrators;
(c) To obtain conflicts statements from the parties; and
(d) To consider, with the parties, whether mediation or other non-adjudicative methods of dispute resolution might
be appropriate.
L-3. Arbitrators
(a) Large, Complex Construction Cases shall be heard and determined by three arbitrators.
(b) The Arbitration Provider shall appoint arbitrator(s) in the manner provided in the Regular Construction Industry
Arbitration Rules.
L-4. Preliminary Hearing
As promptly as practicable after the selection of the arbitrator(s), a preliminary hearing shall be held among the
parties and/or their attorneys or other representatives and the arbitrator(s). Unless the parties agree otherwise,
the preliminary hearing will be conducted by telephone conference call rather than in person.
At the preliminary hearing the matters to be considered shall include, without limitation:
(a) Service of a detailed statement of claims, damages and defenses, a statement of the issues asserted by each
party and positions with respect thereto, and any legal authorities the parties may wish to bring to the
attention of the arbitrator(s);
(b) Stipulations to uncontested facts;
(c) The extent to which discovery shall be conducted;
(d) Exchange and premarking of those documents which each party believes may be offered at the hearing;
(e) The identification and availability of witnesses, including experts, and such matters with respect to witnesses
including their biographies and expected testimony as may be appropriate;
(f) Whether, and the extent to which, any sworn statements and/or depositions may be introduced;
(g) The extent to which hearings will proceed on consecutive days;
(h) Whether a stenographic or other official record of the proceedings shall be maintained;
(i) The possibility of utilizing mediation or other non-adjudicative methods of dispute resolution; and
(j) The procedure for the issuance of subpoenas.
By agreement of the parties and/or order of the arbitrator(s), the pre-hearing activities and the hearing procedures
that will govern the arbitration will be memorialized in a Scheduling and Procedure Order.
L-5. Management of Proceedings
January 31, 2013
29
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
(a) Arbitrator(s) shall take such steps as they may deem necessary or desirable to avoid delay and to achieve a
just, speedy and cost-effective resolution of Large, Complex Construction Cases.
(b) Parties shall cooperate in the exchange of documents, exhibits and information within such party's control if
the arbitrator(s) consider such production to be consistent with the goal of achieving a just, speedy and cost
effective resolution of a Large, Complex Construction Case.
(c) The parties may conduct such discovery as may be agreed to by all the parties provided, however, that the
arbitrator(s) may place such limitations on the conduct of such discovery as the arbitrator(s) shall deem
appropriate. If the parties cannot agree on production of document and other information, the arbitrator(s),
consistent with the expedited nature of arbitration, may establish the extent of the discovery.
(d) At the discretion of the arbitrator(s), upon good cause shown and consistent with the expedited nature of
arbitration, the arbitrator(s) may order depositions of, or the propounding of interrogatories to such persons
who may possess information determined by the arbitrator(s) to be necessary to a determination of the
matter.
(e) The parties shall exchange copies of all exhibits they intend to submit at the hearing 10 business days prior to
the hearing unless the arbitrator(s) determine otherwise.
(f) The exchange of information pursuant to this rule, as agreed by the parties and/or directed by the arbitrator(s),
shall be included within the Scheduling and Procedure Order.
(g) The arbitrator is authorized to resolve any disputes concerning the exchange of information.
(h) Generally hearings will be scheduled on consecutive days or in blocks of consecutive days in order to
maximize efficiency and minimize costs.
The following flow chart provides a summary of the disputes and claims process described in subsections 105.22,
105.23, and 105.24
January 31, 2013
30
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
Contractor provides written notice of dispute to Project Engineer
Contractor provides written REA including the following:
(1) Date of dispute
(2) Nature of order and circumstances causing dispute
(3) Contract provisions supporting dispute
(4) Estimated cost of dispute with supporting documentation
(5) Analysis of progress schedule and disruption, if any
Adjustment of
payment/schedule in
consultation with
Program Engineer -
Dispute is resolved
Dispute is
unresolved
Proj Eng/Res Eng & Supt/PM & Contractor’s rep with decision authority above the
project level to meet regularly to discuss dispute
PE denies merit of dispute
DRB agreement signed
PE determines dispute has merit
DRB renders a recommendation
DRB recommendation is accepted
Either party rejects DRB recommendation
Up to 30 days – 105.22 (d)
105.22 Project Issue – Verbal discussions between Proj. Eng. and Supt.
Impasse
15 Days – 105.22 (b)
CDOT Project Engineer and Contractor discuss merit of dispute
15 Days – 105.22 (c)
Merit granted –
Quantum negotiations
30 Days – 105.22 (c)
10 days – 105.23 (h)
30 days – 105.23 (g)
DRB Hearing
14 days – 105.23 (i)
Figure 105-1
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FLOW CHART
Contractor rejects PE’s denial. Contractor
provides written notice to RE.
Contractor accepts denial.
Dispute is resolved.
7 days – 105.22 (c)
7 days – 105.22 (d)
20 days – 105.23 (d)
5 Days –
105.23 (a)
7 days – 105.22 (c)
Figure 105-1 continued on next page
Prehearing Submittal
15 days – 105.23 (e)
Request for Clarification and Reconsideration
Disagree on quantum
105.23(a) Proj Eng
initiates DRB process
30/ 45 days –
105.23(b)
January 31, 2013
31
REVISION OF SECTION 105
DISPUTES AND CLAIMS FOR CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS
Contractor rejects CE decision Contractor accepts CE decision Decision is implemented
Adjustment of
payment/schedule in
consultation with
Program Engineer -
Dispute is resolved
Optional Mediation
Dispute is unresolved Dispute is resolved
Contractor initiates Resolution is implemented
Binding Arbitration or Litigation
(Whichever was selected at Contract execution)
Litigation
Court Decision
Binding Arbitration
Arbitrator(s) render recommendation
Appeal process only for damages
Chief Engineer
renders decision
45 days – 05.24 (e)
Either party rejects DRB recommendation
Decision is implemented
Contractor submits certified claim package w/RTD (and Audit Unit if over $250K)
Contractor rejects and
appeals RTD decision to CE
Contractor accepts decision
30 days – 105.24 (a)
60 days – 105.24 (d)
60 days – 105.24 (b)
105.24 Notice of intent to file a claim
30 days – 105.24 (d)
Figure 105-1 (continued)
Request for hearing
RTD renders a decision
15 days
105.24 (e)
60 days - 105.24 (e)
30 days – 105.24 (e)
April 26, 2012
1
REVISION OF SECTION 105
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 105.07 and replace with the following:
105.07 Conformity to Roadway Smoothness Criteria of HMA. Roadway smoothness testing and corrective
work shall be performed as described below. The pavement smoothness category shall be HRI Category II
unless shown on the plans.
(a) Smoothness Quality Control Testing.
1. The Contractor shall perform Smoothness Quality Control (SQC) testing. The test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 48 hours of completion. SQC test results shall show the Half Car
Roughness Index (HRI) for each 0.10 mile section and shall show the results for localized roughness.
All traffic control costs associated with SQC testing will be paid for in accordance with Section 630.
SQC testing shall be performed on the first 2,000 tons for the final layer.
SQC testing shall be performed using the Contractor’s inertial profiler, pursuant to the methods
described in subsection 105.07(b) and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The
Contractor’s Profiler shall be certified according to CP 78. A list of certified profilers is located at
http://www.dot.state.co.us/DesignSupport/.
Production shall be suspended if SQC testing indicates that corrective work is required in accordance
with subsection 105.07 (c). If the SQC data becomes available after production has started for the day,
suspension will begin at the end of that production day. Production will remain suspended until the
problem is identified and corrected. Each time production is suspended, corrective actions shall be
proposed in writing by the Contractor. Production will not be allowed to resume until the proposed
corrective actions have been accepted by the Project Engineer in writing.
When production resumes, the Contractor shall profile the first 2,000 tons of HMA. The conditions
above for suspension of work will apply.
2. The finished transverse and longitudinal surface elevation of the pavement shall be measured using a 10
foot straightedge. Areas to be measured will be directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish
an approved 10 foot straightedge, depth gauge and operator to aid the Engineer in testing the pavement
surface. Areas showing high spots of more than 3/16 inch in 10 feet shall be marked and diamond
ground until the high spot does not exceed 3/16 inch in 10 feet.
(b) Initial Smoothness Acceptance Testing. The Contractor shall perform Smoothness Acceptance Testing (SA)
which will be used for acceptance and calculation of incentive and disincentive adjustments.
All traffic control costs associated with SA testing will be paid for in accordance with Section 630.
1. Longitudinal Pavement Surface Smoothness Acceptance. Pavement surfaces shall be tested and
accepted for longitudinal smoothness as described herein.
A. Testing Procedure (General). The longitudinal surface smoothness of the final pavement surface
shall be tested by the Contractor in accordance with CP 74 and using the Contractor’s high-speed
profiler (HSP). The Contractor’s Profiler shall be certified according to CP 78. A list of certified
profilers is located at http://www.dot.state.co.us/DesignSupport/
The HSP instrumentation shall be verified in accordance with CP 74 prior to measurements. The
Contractor shall lay out a distance calibration site. The distance calibration site shall be located no
more than ten miles from the Project limits. The distance calibration site shall be 1056 feet long and
shall be on a relatively flat, straight section of pavement as approved by the Engineer. The site
April 26, 2012
2
REVISION OF SECTION 105
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
shall have a speed limit equal to the Project’s highest speed limit that allows for the HSP to operate
uninterrupted. The limits of the site shall be clearly marked and the distance shall be measured to
an accuracy of +/- 3 inches. The Contractor shall provide in writing the site location to the Engineer.
The cost of the distance calibration site will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be
included in the work.
The entire length of each through lane, climbing lane and passing lane including bridge approaches,
bridge decks and intersections from the beginning to the end of the project shall be profiled in their
planned final configuration. Shoulders less than 12 foot in width and medians will not be profiled
and will not be subject to incentive/disincentive adjustments. Shoulders with a width of 12 feet or
greater, ramps, tapers, turn slots, acceleration lanes and deceleration lanes will be profiled, but will
not be subject to incentive/disincentive adjustments. Shoulders with a width of 12 feet or more,
ramps, tapers, turn slots, acceleration lanes and deceleration lanes will be evaluated for localized
roughness corrective work. The profile of the entire length of a lane shall be taken at one time.
However, the Engineer may break a project into sections to accommodate Project phasing.
A sufficient distance shall be deleted from the profile to allow the profiler to obtain the testing speed
plus a 300 foot distance to stop and start when required. Incentive/disincentive adjustments will not
be made for this area. The final surface of these areas shall be tested in accordance with
subsection 105.07(a) 2.
Shoulders less than 12 foot in width and medians constructed as part of this project shall be
measured in accordance with subsection 105.07(a) 2.
The profile shall include transverse joints when pavement is placed by the project on both sides of
the joint. When pavement is placed on only one side of the joint, the profile shall start 25 feet
outside the project paving limits. The profile of the section of pavement 25 feet outside the paving
limits to 25 feet inside paving limits will not be subjected to incentive or disincentive adjustments,
but will be evaluated for localized roughness.
The profile of the area 25 feet each side of every railroad crossing, cattle guard, bus pad, manhole,
gutter pan and intersection (where there is a planned breakpoint in the profile grade line in the
direction of traffic) shall be deleted from the profile before the HRI is determined.
Incentive/disincentive adjustments will not be made for these areas. Areas deleted from the profile
shall be tested in accordance with subsection 105.07(a) 2.
When both new pavement and a new bridge or new bridge pavement are being constructed in a
project, the profile of the area 25 feet each side of the bridge deck shall be deleted from the profile
before the HRI is determined. Incentive/disincentive adjustments will not be made for this area.
Areas deleted from the profile shall be tested in accordance with subsection 105.07(a) 2. The
bridge deck will be evaluated for localized roughness. Corrective work required in these areas will
not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in the work. For all other projects,
the profile of the area 25 feet each side of the bridge deck shall be deleted from the profile before
the HRI is determined. Incentive/disincentive adjustments will not be made for this area. If the
Engineer determines that corrective work is required in this area, payment will be made in
accordance with subsection 109.04.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at least five working days in advance of his
intention to perform SA testing. The Contractor shall profile the Project within 14 days after the
completion of paving operations. The Engineer will witness the SA profiling and take immediate
possession of the SA data.
The Contractor shall not perform any corrective work that will affect the pavement smoothness for
ten working days after completion of the SA testing or as approved by the Engineer. This time is to
allow for the Department to analyze the data and perform smoothness verification testing.
April 26, 2012
3
REVISION OF SECTION 105
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
B. Smoothness Testing Procedures. The Contractor shall mark the profiling limits and excluded areas.
The Engineer will verify that the Contractor's marks are located properly. The Contractor shall use
traffic cones with reflective tape or reflective tape on the pavement at the beginning and end of each
lane for triggering the start and stop locations on the profiler and at any other location, where
portions of the profile are being deleted. These locations shall be marked with temporary paint so
that the Department’s profiler uses the same locations for smoothness verification testing.
The Contractor shall clear the lanes to be tested of all debris before profiling.
The Contractor shall submit a Method for Handling Traffic (MHT) to the Engineer for approval at
least five days in advance of SA testing. The MHT shall detail the methods for traffic control that will
allow for continuous non-stop profiling of each lane to be profiled at a minimum speed of 15 mph.
The Contractor shall provide the traffic control in accordance with the approved MHT.
Each lane shall be profiled at least once. Profiling shall be at a constant speed (+/- 5 mph of the
distance calibration speed ) with a minimum speed of 15 mph and a maximum speed of 70 mph.
Shoulders with a width of 12 feet or more, ramps, tapers, turn slots, acceleration lanes and
deceleration lanes shall be profiled. The profile shall be taken in the planned direction of travel.
The left and right wheel paths shall be profiled simultaneously. The collected profiles shall be
turned over immediately to the Engineer and will be analyzed using CP 74.
(1) The Department will determine a HRI for each 0.1 mile section or fraction thereof of completed
pavement. The HRI consists of the left and right wheel path's profile passed through the
International Roughness Index (IRI) filter.
The Contractor’s SA test results will be available within ten working days of the completion of
SA testing. The Engineer will give the Contractor a report that will include the lane profiled, the
HRI in 0.10 mile increments and a summary of areas requiring corrective work. The Engineer
may determine that it is necessary for the Contractor to re-profile a lane.
Areas requiring corrective work will be determined according to subsection 105.07(c) 1.
Sections less than 0.01 miles in length shall not be subject to corrective work as specified by
Table 105-6. Sections less than 0.01 miles in length shall be included in the Localized
Roughness determination.
C. Acceptance and incentive/disincentive adjustments for pavement smoothness will be made on a
square yard basis in accordance with the following:
Incentive and Disincentive adjustments will be based on the HRI for each 0.1 mile section or fraction
thereof. Incentive/Disincentive adjustments for Pavement Smoothness will be made in accordance
with Table 105-6. Sections less than 0.01 miles in length will not be subject to disincentives.
April 26, 2012
4
REVISION OF SECTION 105
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
Table 105-6
HMA PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS (INCHES/MILE)
HALF-CAR ROUGHNESS INDEX
Pavement
Smoothness
Category
Incentive Payment
($/sqyd)
No Incentive or
Disincentive
Disincentive Payment
($/sqyd)
Corrective
Work Required
I
When HRI ≤ 40.0
When HRI ≥ 63.0 and
≤ 72.0
When HRI > 72.0 and
< 90.0
When HRI >
90.0
I = $1.28 I = $0.00
I = 5.12 – 0.07111 x
HRI
When HRI > 40.0 and
< 63.0 When HRI ≥ 90.0
I = 3.51 – 0.05565 x
HRI I = – $1.28
II
When HRI ≤ 35.0
When HRI ≥ 58.0 and
≤ 67.0
When HRI > 67.0 and
< 85.0
When HRI >
85.0
I = $1.28 I = $0.00
I = 4.76 – 0.07111 x
HRI
When HRI > 35.0 and
< 58.0 When HRI ≥ 85.0
I = 3.23 – 0.05565 x
HRI I = – $1.28
III
When HRI ≤ 45.0
When HRI ≥ 70.0 and
≤ 80.0
When HRI > 80.0 and
< 100.0
When HRI >
100.0
I = $1.28 I = $0.00 I = 5.12 – 0.064 x HRI
When HRI > 45.0 and
< 70.0 When HRI ≥ 100
I = 3.584 – 0.0512 x
April 26, 2012
5
REVISION OF SECTION 105
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
The criteria for determining if a 0.1 mile section or fraction thereof requires corrective work is specified in
Table 105-6. In addition to determining if a 0.1 mile section or fraction thereof requires corrective work, the
profiles shall be analyzed for areas of Localized Roughness.
Localized Roughness. The profiles shall be analyzed to determine where areas of localized roughness
occur. The profile shall be summarized using the continuous HRI reporting system using an averaging
length of 25 feet. The FHWA’s ProVal (Version 3.2 or later) software will be used to generate the continuous
HRI report. ProVal can be downloaded at http://www.roadprofile.com.
Areas of localized roughness are determined to be where the continuous HRI report exceeds the values in
Table 105-9. Areas of localized roughness greater than 15.0 feet in length shall be considered deficient, and
require corrective work.. Areas of localized roughness less than 25 feet in distance that contain a valve box
shall be tested in accordance with subsection 105.07 (a) 2. for corrective work.
Table 105-9
CONTINUOUS HRI USING 25 FOOT AVERAGING FOR LOCALIZED
ROUGHNESS CORRECTIVE WORK ON HMA PAVEMENTS
HRI
SMOOTHNESS
CATEGORY
HRI In/mile
I 135.0
II 125.0
III 150.0
1. Corrective Methods. Corrective work shall consist of diamond grinding, an approved overlay, or removal
and replacement.
Corrective work shall conform to of one of the following conditions:
(1) Removal and Replacement. The pavement requiring corrective work shall be removed, full width of
the lane and the full thickness of the layer in accordance with subsection 202.09.
The removal area shall begin and end with a transverse butt joint, which shall be constructed with a
transverse saw cut perpendicular to centerline. Replacement material shall be placed in sufficient
quantity so the finished surface conforms to grade and smoothness requirements. Sections removed
and replaced shall be at least 0.20 miles in length.
(2) Overlay. The overlay shall cover the full width of the pavement including shoulders. The area
overlaid shall begin and end with a transverse butt joint, which shall be constructed with a transverse
saw cut and asphalt removal. All material shall be approved hot bituminous mixtures that meet all
contract requirements. The overlay shall be placed so that the finished surface conforms to grade
and smoothness requirements. The overlay area shall be compacted to the specified density. The
overlay thickness shall be equivalent to that of the final layer in accordance with the Contract.
Sections overlaid shall be at least 0.20 miles in length.
(3) Diamond Grinding. Grinding shall not reduce planned pavement thickness by more than 0.3 inches.
The entire ground area of the final pavement surface shall be covered with a Tack Coat conforming
to Section 407 (CSS-1h at 0.1 gallons per square yard of diluted emulsion; the emulsion shall be
diluted with water at the rate of 50 percent water and 50 percent emulsion) when grinding is
complete. Cores shall be taken to verify that minimum pavement thicknesses have been maintained.
A minimum of one core shall be taken every 100 cumulative feet or fraction thereof per lane of
diamond grinding, as directed by the Engineer. Coring shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
April 26, 2012
6
REVISION OF SECTION 105
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
(d) Final Smoothness Acceptance Testing. After the Contractor has completed the required corrective work and
any additional corrective work, the Contractor shall retest the pavement in accordance with subsection
105.07(b). If the Contractor requests to do additional corrective work to reduce disincentive after Final SA
Testing, the Contractor shall perform an additional Final SA Testing for the project. A charge of $500 will be
assessed to the Contractor for each additional Final SA Testing. Time count will be charged pursuant to
contract requirements during the time period required for all Final SA Testing. Del ays associated with
additional Final SA Testing will be considered non-excusable and non-compensable.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer pursuant to 105.07(b) to schedule the final SA testing.
Final acceptance and incentive/disincentive adjustments for pavement smoothness will be made on a square
yard basis in accordance with the following:
Incentive payments will be based on the HRI for each 0.1 mile section or fraction thereof from the
Contractor’s initial SA testing. Those sections which earned incentives or full payment based on the initial
SA testing will not be re-evaluated for incentive after final SA testing.
The disincentive payment will be ba sed on the HRI for each 0.1 mile section or fraction thereof from the
Contractor’s Initial SA testing or the Contractor’s Final SA testing, whichever is less. Those sections which
had disincentive levels indicated by the initial SA, will be re-evaluated for disincentive. The Contractor may
eliminate all disincentives on those 0.1 mile sections; however, no incentives may be earned in these areas,
regardless of the final smoothness.
(e) Department Smoothness Verification Testing (SV). The Department may elect to perform smoothness
verification (SV) testing using the Department’s inertial profiler, with the methods described in subsection
105.07(b). The Engineer will notify the Contractor of the Department's intention to perform SV testing. All
traffic control costs associated with Department SV testing will be paid for by the Department in accordance
with Section 630.
The Contractor’s SA test results will be compared to the Department’s SV test results. The Contractor’s SA
test results will be considered acceptable and will be used for incentive/disincentive payment if the following
criteria are met:
(1) The difference in HRI for a 1/10 mile section is less than 6.1 inches/mile for a minimum of 90 percent of
the 1/10mile sections for each lane.
(2) The difference in average HRI for each lane is less than 6.1 inches/mile.
(3) The difference in the length of each lane is less than 0.2 percent
When the Contractor’s SA test results are not considered acceptable, the Department’s SV test results will be
used for incentive/disincentive payment and the Contractor’s profiler certification will be evaluated pursuant to
CP 78. The Department will have 30 days to complete this evaluation.
The Contractor will be assessed a charge of $1,000 for SV testing when the Contractor’s SA test results are
not considered acceptable.
(f) HMA Recycling Treatment’s, Thin Lifts’ and Urban Rehabilitation treatment’s smoothness criteria. When
HMA recycling, urban rehabilitation treatments or when only one layer less than 1.5 inches of HMA Pavement
is placed without an intermediate treatment are constructed as the final riding surface, the following shall be
used for acceptance:
An HRI for each 0.1 mile section shall be determined on the original pavement surface prior to
beginning the work.
An HRI for each 0.1 mile section shall be determined on the pavement surface after the work is
complete.
April 26, 2012
7
REVISION OF SECTION 105
HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
When a 0.1 mile section has a final HRI greater than 80.0 in/mile and the final HRI is greater than the HRI
prior to performing the work, that 0.1 mile section shall be corrected by a method approved in writing by
the Engineer. Corrective work shall be such that the resulting final HRI is equal to or less than the initial
HRI or 80.0 in/mile, whichever is greater. A ll costs associated with corrective work shall be at the
Contractor’s expense, including but not limited to traffic control, additional hot mix asphalt, grinding and
milling.
Incentive/disincentive adjustments for smoothness will not be made for these treatments.
The pavement smoothness for HMA Recycling Treatments and Thin Lifts that will be overlaid with a final
riding surface will not be evaluated by the Department for acceptance.
REVISION OF SECTION 105
April 26, 2012
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 105.08 (b) 1. A. delete the eighth paragraph and replace with the following:
The profile shall include transverse joints when pavement is placed by the project on both sides of the joint.
When pavement is placed on only one side of the joint, the profile shall start 25 feet outside the project paving
limits.
In subsection 105.08 (b) 1. C. delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:
Incentive/Disincentive adjustments for Pavement Smoothness will be made in accordance with Table 105-10.
Sections less than 0.01 miles in length will not be subject to disincentives. The profile of the section of pavement
25 feet outside the paving limits to 25 feet inside the paving limits will not be subjected to incentive or disincentive
adjustments, but will be evaluated for localized roughness.
In subsection 105.08 (c) delete the sixth and seventh paragraphs and replace with the following:
Localized Roughness. The profiles shall be analyzed to determine where areas of localized roughness occur.
The profile shall be summarized using the continuous HRI reporting system using an averaging length of 25 feet.
The FHWA’s ProVal (Version 3.2 or later) software will be used to generate the continuous HRI report. ProVal
can be downloaded at http://www.roadprofile.com.
Areas of localized roughness are determined to be where the continuous HRI report exceeds the values in Table
105-11. Areas of localized roughness greater than 15.0 feet in length shall be considered deficient, and require
corrective work. Areas of localized roughness less than 25 feet in distance that contain a valve box shall be
tested in accordance with subsection 105.08 (a) 2. for corrective work.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 105
VIOLATION OF WORKING TIME LIMITATION
Section 105 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 105.03 shall include the following:
If there is a violation of the working time limitations for traffic control as set forth in the special provisions, a written
notice to stop work will be imposed on the Contractor at the start of the next working day. Work shall not resume
until the Contractor assures the Engineer, in writing, that there will not be a reoccurrence of the working time
violation. If more violations take place, the Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing that there will be a price
reduction charge for each incident in accordance with this specification. This incident price reduction charge will
be deducted from any money due the Contractor. This price reduction will not be considered a penalty but will be
a price reduction for failure to perform traffic control in compliance with the Contract.
An incident is any violation up to 30 minutes in duration. Each 30 minutes or increment thereof will be considered
as an incident. A price reduction will be assessed for each successive or cumulative 30 minute period in violation
of the working time limitations, as determined by the Engineer. The price reduction for each incident will increase
at a progressive rate starting with $150 for the second incident and increasing to $1200 for the fifth and
subsequent incidents in accordance with the following schedule. A 15 minute grace period will be allowed at the
beginning of the second incident on the project before the price reduction is applied. This 15 minute grace period
applies only to the second incident.
The number of incident charges will be accumulative throughout the duration of the Contract.
PRICE REDUCTION SCHEDULE
Incident Incident Rate Total Price
Reduction
1st Notice to Stop Work ----
2 nd $150 $150
3rd 300 450
4 th 600 1,050
5th 1,200 2,250
6 th 1,200 3,450
Etc. 1,200 4,650
Etc. Etc.
February 3, 2011
1
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Sections 105 and 106 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 105.05 and replace with the following:
105.05 Conformity to the Contract of Hot Mix Asphalt. Conformity to the Contract of all Hot Mix Asphalt, Item
403, except Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) and temporary pavement will be determined by tests and evaluations of
elements that include asphalt content, gradation, in-place density and joint density in accordance with the
following:
All work performed and all materials furnished shall conform to the lines, grades, cross sections, dimensions, and
material requirements, including tolerances, shown in the Contract.
For those items of work where working tolerances are not specified, the Contractor shall perform the work in a
manner consistent with reasonable and customary manufacturing and construction practices.
When the Engineer finds the materials or work furnished, work performed, or the finished product are not in
conformity with the Contract and has resulted in an inferior or unsatisfactory product, the work or material shall be
removed and replaced or otherwise corrected at the expense of the Contractor.
Materials will be sampled randomly and tested by the Department in accordance with Section 106 and with the
applicable procedures contained in the Department's Field Materials Manual. The approximate maximum quantity
represented by each sample will be as set forth in Section 106. Additional samples may be selected and tested
as set forth in Section 106 at the Engineer's discretion.
A process will consist of either a single test value or a series of test values resulting from related tests of an
element of the Contractor’s work and materials. An element is a material or workmanship property that can be
tested and evaluated for quality level by the Department approved sampling, testing, and analytical procedures.
All materials produced will be assigned to a process. A change in process is defined as a change that affects the
element involved. For any element, with the exception of the process for joint density element, a process
normally will include all produced materials associated with that element prior to a change in the job mix formula
(Form 43). For joint density, a new process will be established for each new layer of pavement or for changes in
joint construction. Density measurements taken within each compaction test section will be a separate process.
The Engineer may separate a process in order to accommodate small quantities or unusual variations.
Evaluation of materials for pay factors (PF) will be done using only the Department’s acceptance test results.
Each process will have a PF computed in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Test results
determined to have sampling or testing errors will not be used.
Except for in-place density measurements taken within a compaction test section, any test result for an element
greater than the distance 2 x V (see Table 105-2) outside the tolerance limits will be designated as a separate
process and the pay factor will be calculated in accordance with subsection 105.05(a). An element pay factor
less than zero shall be zero. The calculated PF will be used to determine the Incentive/Disincentive Payment
(I/DP) for the process.
In the case of in-place density or joint density the Contractor will be allowed to core the exact location (or
immediately adjacent location for joint density) of a test result more than 2 x V outside the tolerance limit. The
core must be taken and furnished to the Engineer within eight hours after notification by the Engineer of the test
result. The result of this core will be used in lieu of the previous test result. Cores not taken within eight hours
after notification by the Engineer will not be used in lieu of the test result. All costs associated with coring will be
at the Contractor s expense.
(a) Representing Small Quantities. When it is necessary to represent a process by only one or two test results,
PF will be the average of PFs resulting from the following:
If the test result is within the tolerance limits then PF = 1.00
February 3, 2011
2
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
If the test result is above the maximum specified limit, then
PF = 1.00 – [0.25(TO
- TU
)/V]
If the test result is below the minimum specified limit, then
PF = 1.00 – [0.25(TL
- TO
)/V]
Where: PF = pay factor.
V = V factor from Table 105-2.
TO
= the individual test result.
TU
= upper specification limit.
TL
= lower specification limit.
The calculated PF will be used to determine the I/DP for the process.
(b) Determining Quality Level. Each process with three or more test results will be evaluated for a quality level
(QL) in accordance with Colorado Procedure 71.
(c) Gradation Element. Each specified sieve, with the exception of 100 percent passing sieves, will be evaluated
for QL separately. The lowest calculated QL for a sieve will be designated as the QL for gradation element
for the process.
(d) Joint Density Element. Joint Density will be tested according to subsection 401.17.
(e) Process Pay Factor. Using the calculated QL for the process, compute PF as follows: The final number of
random samples (Pn) in each process will determine the final pay factor. . As test values are accumulated
for each process, Pn will change accordingly. When the process has been completed, the number of random
samples it contains will determine the computation of PF, based on Table 105-3 and formula (1) below.
When Pn is from 3 to 9, or greater than 200, PF will be computed using the formulas designated in Table 105-
3. Where Pn is equal to or greater than 10 and less than 201, PF will be computed by formula (1):
Where, when referring to Table 105-3:
PF1
= PF determined at the next lowest Pn formula using process QL
PF2
= PF determined using the Pn formula shown for the process QL
PF3
= PF determined at the next highest Pn formula using process QL
Pn2
= the lowest Pn in the spread of values listed for the process Pn formula
Pn3
= the lowest Pn in the spread of values listed for the next highest Pn formula
PnX
= the actual number of test values in the process
When evaluating the item of Furnish Hot mix asphalt, the PF for the element of In-Place Density shall be 1.0.
Regardless of QL, the maximum PF in relation to Pn is limited in accordance with Table 105-3.
(PF1
+ PF2
) (PF2
+ PF3
) (PF1
+ PF2
) (Pn2
– PnX
)
(1) PF = ------------------ + [ ------------------ - --------------------] x ------------------
2 2 2 (Pn2
February 3, 2011
3
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
As test results become available, they will be used to calculate accumulated QL and PF numbers for each
process. The process I/DP’s will then be calculated and accumulated for each element and for the item. The
test results and the accumulated calculations will be made available to the Contractor upon request.
Numbers from the calculations will be carried to significant figures and rounded according to AASHTO
Standard Recommended Practice R-11, Rounding Method.
(f) Evaluation of Work. When the PF of a process is 0.75 or greater, the finished quantity of work represented by
the process will be accepted at the appropriate pay factor. If the PF is less than 0.75, the Engineer may:
1. Require complete removal and replacement with specification material at the Contractor’s expense;
or
2. Where the finished product is found to be capable of performing the intended purpose and the value of
the finished product is not affected, permit the Contractor to leave the material in place.
If the material is permitted to remain in place the PF for the process will not be greater than 0.75. When
condition red, as described in Section 106, exists for any element, resolution and correction will be in
accordance with Section 106. Material, which the Engineer determines is defective, may be isolated and
rejected without regard to sampling sequence or location within a process.
If removal and replacement is required because the joint density PF for a process is below 0.75, the
Contractor shall remove and replace the full lane width adjacent to and including at least 6 inches beyond the
visible joint line for the entire length of joint representing the process. If the lane removed is adjacent to
another joint, that joint shall also be removed to a point 6 inches beyond the visible joint line. When a single
joint density core is more than 2V outside the tolerance limits, the removal and replacement limits shall be
identified by coring the failing joint at 25 foot intervals until two successive cores are found to be 1V or less
below the minimum tolerance limit. If removal and replacement is required, the Contractor shall submit
documentation identifying the process to be used to correct the area in question in writing. The process will
be approved by the Engineer before commencing the corrective work.
Table 105-2
“W” AND “V” FACTORS FOR VARIOUS ELEMENTS
Hot Mix Asphalt
Element V Factor W Factor
2.36 mm (No. 8) mesh and larger sieves 2.80 N/A
600 μm (No. 30) mesh sieve 1.80 N/A
75 μm (No. 200) mesh sieve 0.80 N/A
Gradation N/A 15
Asphalt Content 0.20 25
In-place Density 1.10 45
Joint Density 1.60 15
Table 105-3
FORMULAS FOR CALCULATING PF BASED ON PN
February 3, 2011
4
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Pn
When Pn as shown at left is 3 to 9, or greater than 200, use
designated formula below to calculate Pay Factor, PF = ...,
when Pn is 10 to 200, use formula (1) above:
Maximum PF
3 0.31177 + 1.57878 (QL/100) - 0.84862 (QL/100)2
1.025
4 0.27890 + 1.51471 (QL/100) - 0.73553 (QL/100)2
1.030
5 0.25529 + 1.48268 (QL/100) - 0.67759 (QL/100)2
1.030
6 0.19468 + 1.56729 (QL/100) - 0.70239 (QL/100)2
1.035
7 0.16709 + 1.58245 (QL/100) - 0.68705 (QL/100)2
1.035
8 0.16394 + 1.55070 (QL/100) - 0.65270 (QL/100)2
1.040
9 0.11412 + 1.63532 (QL/100) - 0.68786 (QL/100)2
1.040
10 to 11 0.15344 + 1.50104 (QL/100) - 0.58896 (QL/100)2
1.045
12 to 14 0.07278 + 1.64285 (QL/100) - 0.65033 (QL/100)2
1.045
15 to 18 0.07826 + 1.55649 (QL/100) - 0.56616 (QL/100)2
1.050
19 to 25 0.09907 + 1.43088 (QL/100) - 0.45550 (QL/100)2
1.050
26 to 37 0.07373 + 1.41851 (QL/100) - 0.41777 (QL/100)2
1.055
38 to 69 0.10586 + 1.26473 (QL/100) - 0.29660 (QL/100)2
1.055
70 to 200 0.21611 + 0.86111 (QL/100) 1.060
> 201 0.15221 + 0.92171 (QL/100) 1.060
(g) Process I/DP Computation.
I/DP = (PF - 1)(QR)(UP)(W/100)
Where: I/DP = Incentive/Disincentive Payment
PF = Pay Factor
QR = Quantity in Tons of HMA Represented by the Process
UP = Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Mix
W = Element Factor from Table 105-2
When AC is paid for separately UP shall be:
UP = [(TonHMA)(UPHMA) + (TonAC)(UPAC)]/Ton
HMA
Where: TonHMA
UP
= Tons of Asphalt Mix
HMA
Ton
= Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Mix
AC
UP
= Tons of Asphalt Cement
AC
= Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Cement
For the joint density element:
February 3, 2011
5
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
Where: UPHMA
is as defined above.
When AC is paid for separately UP shall be:
UP = [(BTonHMA)(BUPHMA) + (BTonAC)(BUPAC)]/BTon
HMA
Where: BTonHMA
BUP
= Bid Tons of Asphalt Mix
HMA
BTon
= Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Mix
AC
BUP
= Bid Tons of Asphalt Cement
AC
= Unit Bid Price of Asphalt Cement
(h) Element I/DP. The I/DP for an element shall be computed by accumulating the process I/DP’s for
that element.
(i) I/DP for a Mix Design. The I/DP for a mix design shall be computed by accumulating the individual I/DP’s for
the asphalt content, in-place density, and gradation elements for that mix design. The accumulated
quantities of materials for each element must be the same at the end of I/DP calculations for a mix design.
(j) Project I/DP. The I/DP for the project shall be computed by accumulating the mix design I/DP’s and the joint
density I/DP’s. The accumulated quantities of materials for each element must be the same at the end of
I/DP calculations for the project.
Delete subsection 106.05 and replace with the following:
106.05 Sampling and Testing of Hot Mix Asphalt. All hot mix asphalt, Item 403, except Hot Mix Asphalt
(Patching) and temporary pavement shall be tested in accordance with the following program of process control
testing and acceptance testing:
The Contract will specify whether process control testing by the Contractor is mandatory or voluntary.
(a) Process Control Testing.
1. Mandatory Process Control. When process control testing is mandatory the Contractor shall be
responsible for process control testing on all elements and at the frequency listed in Table 106-1.
Process control testing shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor.
After completion of compaction, in-place density tests for process control shall be taken at the frequency
shown in Table 106-1. The results shall be reported in writing to the Engineer on a daily basis. Daily
plots of the test results with tonnage represented shall be made on a chart convenient for viewing by the
Engineer. All of the testing equipment used for in-place density testing shall conform to the requirements
of acceptance testing standards, except nuclear testing devices need not be calibrated on the
Department’s calibration blocks.
For elements other than in-place density, results from quality control tests need not be plotted, or
routinely reported to the Engineer. This does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of
performing such testing along with appropriate plant monitoring as necessary to assure that produced
material conforms to the applicable specifications. Quality control test data shall be made available to the
Engineer upon request.
2. Voluntary Process Control. The Contractor may conduct process control testing. Process control testing
is not required, but is recommended on the elements and at the frequency listed in Table 106-1.
All of the testing equipment used for in-place density testing shall conform to the requirements of
acceptance testing standards, except nuclear testing devices need not be calibrated on the Department’s
calibration blocks.
February 3, 2011
6
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
(b) Acceptance Testing. Acceptance testing is the responsibility of the Department. For acceptance testing the
Department will determine the locations where samples or measurements are to be taken and as designated
in Section 403. The maximum quantity of material represented by each test result, the elements, the
frequency of testing and the minimum number of test results will be in accordance with Table 106-1. The
location or time of sampling will be based on the stratified random procedure as described in CP 75.
Acceptance sampling and testing procedures will be in accordance with the Schedule for Minimum Materials
Sampling, Testing and Inspection in the Department’s Field Materials Manual. Samples for project
acceptance testing shall be taken by the Contractor in accordance with the designated method. The samples
shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall reduce each sample
to the size designated by the Engineer. The Contractor may retain a split of the each sample which cannot be
included as part of the Contractor’s process control testing. All materials being used are subject to inspection
and testing at any time prior to or during incorporation into the work.
Table 106-1
SCHEDULE FOR MINIMUM SAMPLING AND TESTING
Element Process Control Acceptance
Asphalt Content 1/500 tons 1/1000 tons
Theoretical
Maximum Specific
Gravity
1.1000 tons, minimum
1/day 1/1000 tons, minimum 1/day
Gradation 1/Day 1/2000 tons
In-Place Density 1/500 tons 1/500 tons
Joint Density 1 core/2500 linear feet of
joint 1 core /5000 linear feet of joint
Aggregate
Percent
Moisture
1/2000 tons or 1/Day if
(3) less than 2000 tons
1/2000 tons
Percent Lime (3) (4) 1/Day Not applicable
Notes:
(1) The minimum number of in-place density tests for acceptance will be 5.
(2) Process control tests for gradation are not required if less than 250 tons
are placed in a day. The minimum number of process control tests for
gradation shall be one test for each 1000 tons or fraction thereof.
(3) Not to be used for incentive/disincentive pay. Test according to CP 60B
and report results from Form 106 or Form 565 on Form 6.
(4) Verified per Contractor’s QC Plan.
February 3, 2011
7
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105 AND 106
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
(LESS THAN 5000 TONS)
(c) Reference Conditions. Three reference conditions can exist determined by the Moving Quality Level (MQL).
The MQL will be calculated in accordance with the procedure in CP 71 for Determining Quality Level (QL).
The MQL will be calculated using only acceptance tests. The MQL will be calculated on tests 1 through 3,
then tests 1 through 4, then tests 1 through 5, then thereafter on the last five consecutive test results. The
MQL will not be used to determine pay factors. The three reference conditions and actions that will be taken
are described as follows:
1. Condition green will exist for an element when an MQL of 90 or greater is reached, or maintained, and the
past five consecutive test results are within the specification limits.
2. Condition yellow will exist for all elements at the beginning of production or when a new process is
established because of changes in materials or the job-mix formula, following an extended suspension of
work, or when the MQL is less than 90 and equal to or greater than 65. Once an element is at condition
green, if the MQL falls below 90 or a t est result falls outside the specification limits, the condition will
revert to yellow or red as appropriate.
3. Condition red will exist for any element when the MQL is less than 65. The Contractor shall be notified
immediately in writing and the process control sampling and testing frequency increased to a minimum
rate of 1/250 tons for that element. The process control sampling and testing frequency shall remain at
1/250 tons until the process control QL reaches or exceeds 78. If the QL for the next five process control
tests is below 65, production will be suspended.
If gradation is the element with MQL less than 65, the Department will test one randomly selected sample
in the first 1250 tons produced in condition red. If this test result is outside the tolerance limits, production
will be suspended. (This test result will not be included as an acceptance test.)
After condition red exists, a new MQL will be started. Acceptance testing will stay at the frequency shown
in Table 106-1. After three acceptance tests, if the MQL is less than 65, production will be suspended.
Production will remain suspended until the source of the problem is identified and corrected. Each time
production is suspended, corrective actions shall be proposed in writing by the Contractor and approved
in writing by the Engineer before production may resume.
Upon resuming production, the process control sampling and testing frequency for the elements causing
the condition red shall remain at 1/250 tons. If the QL for the next five process control tests is below 65,
production will be suspended again. If gradation is the element with MQL less than 65, the Department
will test one randomly selected sample in the first 1250 tons produced in condition red. If this test result is
outside the tolerance limits, production will be suspended.
May 2, 2013
1
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Sections 105, 106, 412, 601 and 709 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 105.06 and replace with the following:
105.06 Conformity to the Contract of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. Conformity to the Contract of all
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, Item 412, will be determined in accordance with the following:
When the Engineer finds that the materials furnished, the work performed, or the finished product does not
conform with the Contract, or the Pay Factor (PF) for an element's process is less than 0.75 but that reasonably
acceptable work has been produced, the Engineer will determine the extent of the work that will be accepted and
remain in place. The Engineer will use a Contract Modification Order to document the justification for allowing the
work to remain in place and the price adjustment that will be applied.
When the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished product is not in conformity with
the Contract, or the PF for an element's process is less than 0.75 and has resulted in an inferior or unsatisfactory
product, the work or material shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the expense of the
Contractor. When the PF for any process is 0.75 or greater, the finished quantity of work represented by the
process will be accepted at the calculated pay factor.
Materials will be sampled and tested by the Contractor and the Department in accordance with subsection 106.06
and with procedures contained in the Department's Field Materials Manual. The approximate quantity
represented by each sample will be as set forth in subsection 106.06, Tables 106-2 and 106-3. Additional
samples may be selected and tested at the Engineer's discretion.
(a) Incentive and Disincentive Payments (I/DP) will be made based on a statistical analysis that yields Pay
Factors (PF) and Quality Levels (QL). The PF and QL will be made based on test results for the elements of
compressive strength and pavement thickness (compressive strength criteria) or the elements of flexural
strength and pavement thickness (flexural strength criteria). The Department will indicate in the plans whether
compressive strength or flexural strength criteria will be used.
Incentive or Disincentive payment will not be made for thickness of concrete pavement furnished by the
Contractor and placed by others.
When compressive strength criteria is indicated, then the QL will be calculated for the elements of
compressive strength and pavement thickness on a process basis. When flexural strength criteria is
indicated, then the QL will be calculated for the elements of flexural strength and pavement thickness on a
process basis. A separate process will be established for an element when a change in the process affects
that element. A process will consist of the test results from a series of random samples. Test results
determined to have sampling or testing errors will not be used. All materials produced will be assigned to a
process. A change in process is defined as a change that affects the element involved. Changes in mix
design, material source, design pavement thickness, or the method being utilized to place the pavement are
considered changes in process. The following is provided to clarify changes in processes for each element:
1. Construction of mainline pavement, including the shoulders if placed with the mainline, is a single
process, providing there are no changes in process as described above.
2. Construction of ramps, acceleration and deceleration lanes, shoulders placed separately, and areas
requiring hand work are considered separate processes.
3. A change in the mix design is a process change for the compressive strength element or the flexural
strength element, but is not a process change for the pavement thickness element.
(b) When it is necessary to represent material by one or two tests, each individual test shall have a PF computed
in accordance with the following:
May 2, 2013
2
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
If the value of the test is at or above the lower tolerance limit, then PF = 1.000. If the value of the test is
below the lower tolerance limit, then:
PF = 1.00 – [0.25(TL -T0
where: PF = pay factor.
)/V]
V = V factor from Tables 105-4 or 105-5.
T0
T
= the individual test value.
L
(c) The following procedures will be used to compute Incentive and Disincentive Payments (I/DP), quality levels
(QL), and pay factors (PF) for processes represented by three or more tests:
= lower tolerance limit.
1. Quality Level (QL) will be calculated according to CP-71.
2. Compute the PF for the process. When the process has been completed, the number of tests (Pn) it
includes shall determine the formula to be used to compute the final pay factor in accordance with the
following:
A. For compressive strength and pavement thickness:
When 3 ≤ Pn ≤ 5
If QL ≥ 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.001333
If QL < 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.005208
When 6 ≤ Pn ≤ 9
If QL ≥ 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.002000
If QL < 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.005682
When 10 ≤ Pn ≤ 25
If QL ≥ 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.002857
If QL < 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.006098
When Pn ≥ 26
If QL ≥ 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.004000
If QL < 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.006757
B. For flexural strength:
When 3 ≤ Pn ≤ 5
If QL ≥ 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.002000
If QL < 85, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 85)0.005208
When 6 ≤ Pn ≤ 9
If QL ≥ 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.003000
If QL < 90, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 90)0.005682
When 10 ≤ Pn ≤ 25
If QL ≥ 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.004286
If QL < 93, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 93)0.006098
When Pn ≥ 26
If QL ≥ 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.006000
If QL < 95, then PF = 1.00 + (QL - 95)0.006757
May 2, 2013
3
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
3. Compute the I/DP for the process:
I/DP = (PF-1)(QR)(UP)
where: QR = Quantity Represented by the process.
UP = Unit Price bid for the Item.
The total I/DP for an element shall be computed by accumulating the individual I/DP for each process of
that element.
(d) As acceptance test results become available, they will be used to calculate accumulated QL and Incentive
and Disincentive Payments (I/DP) for each element and for the item. The Contractor's test results and the
accumulated calculations shall be made available to the Engineer upon request. The Engineer's test results
and the calculations will be made available to the Contractor as early as reasonably practical. Numbers from
the calculations shall be carried to significant figures and rounded according to AASHTO Standard
Recommended Practice R-11, Rounding Method.
I/DP will be made to the Contractor in accordance with subsection 412.24(a). During production, interim I/DP
will be computed for information only. The Pn will change as production continues and test results
accumulate. The Pn at the time an I/DP is computed shall determine the formula to be used.
(e) The Contractor shall not have the option of accepting a price reduction or disincentive in lieu of producing
specification material. Continued production of non-specification material will not be permitted. Material
which is obviously defective may be isolated and rejected without regard to sampling sequence or location
within a process.
Table 105-4
"V" FACTORS AND INCENTIVE PAYMENTS
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CRITERIA
Element V factor
Maximum
Incentive
Payment
Lower Tolerance
Limit, TL
Compressive Strength 400 psi 2.00 percent 4,500 psi
Pavement Thickness 0.4 inch 2.00 percent Plan Thickness
-0.4 inch
Table 105-5
"V" FACTORS AND INCENTIVE PAYMENTS
FLEXURAL STRENGTH CRITERIA
Element
V factor
Maximum
Incentive
Payment
Lower Tolerance
Limit, TL
Flexural Strength 50 psi 3.00% 570 psi
Pavement Thickness 0.4 inch 2.00% Plan Thickness
-0.4"
Sand Equivalence. If compressive strength criteria is indicated then the sand equivalence (SE) as determined by
CP 37 will be considered acceptable when the running average of three consecutive tests is greater than 80
percent and no individual test result is less than 75 percent. When the running average of three consecutive SE
tests falls below 80 percent or an individual SE test result falls below 75 percent, paving operations shall be
suspended. The Contractor shall submit a written plan to correct the low SE test results to the Engineer for
May 2, 2013
4
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
approval. The Contractor shall not continue paving operations until the Engineer approves the plan in writing and
three SE test results from random samples in the stockpile are above 80 percent.
Delete subsection 106.06 and replace with the following:
106.06 Sampling and Testing of Portland Cement Concrete Paving. All Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement, Item 412, shall be tested in accordance with the following quality control and acceptance testing
procedures:
(a) Quality Control Testing. The Contractor shall be responsible for quality control testing of all elements listed in
Table 106-2 or 106-3. Quality control testing shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall develop a quality control plan (QCP) in accordance with the following:
1. Quality Control Plan. For each element listed in Tables 106-2 or 106-3, the QCP must provide adequate
details to ensure that the Contractor will perform quality control. The Contractor shall submit the QCP to
the Engineer at the preconstruction conference. The Contractor shall not start any work on the project
until the Engineer has approved the QCP in writing.
A. Frequency of Tests or Measurements. The QCP shall indicate a random sampling frequency, which
shall be equal to or more frequent than that shown in Table 106-2 or 106-3. The quality control tests
shall be independent of acceptance tests.
B. Test Result Chart. Each quality control test result, the appropriate area, volume, and the tolerance
limits shall be plotted. The chart shall be posted daily at a location convenient for viewing by the
Engineer.
C. Quality Level Chart. The QL for each element in Table 106-2 or 106-3 shall be plotted. The QL shall
be calculated in accordance with the procedure in CP 71 for Determining Quality Level. The QL shall
be calculated on tests 1 through 3, then tests 1 through 4, then tests 1 through 5, then thereafter the
last five consecutive test results. The area of material represented by the last test result shall
correspond to the QL.
D. F-test and t-test Charts. If flexural strength criteria is indicated, then the results of F-test and t-test
analysis between the Department's verification tests of flexural strength and the Contractor's quality
control tests of flexural strength shall be shown on charts. The F-test and t-test shall be calculated in
accordance with standard statistical procedures using all verification tests and quality control tests
completed to date. When a verification test is completed, the F-test and t-test calculations shall be
redone. The area of material represented by the last test result shall correspond to the F-test and t-
test. A warning value of 5 percent and an alert value of 1 percent shall be shown on each chart. The
chart shall be posted daily at a location convenient for viewing by the Engineer.
2. Point of Sampling. The material for quality control testing shall be sampled by the Contractor using CP
61. The location where material samples will be taken shall be indicated in the QCP.
3. Testing Standards. The QCP shall indicate which testing standards will be followed. Acceptable
standards are Colorado Procedures, AASHTO and ASTM. The order of precedence is Colorado
Procedures, AASHTO procedures and then ASTM procedures.
The compressive strength test for quality control will be the average strength of two test cylinders cast in
plastic molds from a single sample of concrete, cured under standard laboratory conditions, and tested
three to seven days after molding.
4. Testing Supervisor Qualifications. The person in charge of and responsible for the quality control testing
shall be identified in the QCP. This person shall be present on the project and possess one or more of
the following qualifications:
A. Registration as a Professional Engineer in the State of Colorado.
May 2, 2013
5
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
B. Registration as an Engineer in Training in the State of Colorado with two years of paving experience.
C. A Bachelor of Science in Civil Engineering or Civil Engineering Technology with three years of paving
experience.
D. National Institute for Certification in Engineering (NICET) certification at level III or higher in the
subfields of Transportation Engineering Technology, Highway Materials, or Construction Materials
Testing Engineering Technology, Concrete and four years of paving experience.
5. Technician Qualifications. Technicians performing tests shall meet the requirements of Colorado
Procedure 10.
6. Testing Equipment. All of the testing equipment used to conduct quality control testing shall conform to
the standards specified in the test procedures and be in good working order. If flexural strength criteria is
indicated, then the Contractor shall provide the following equipment and supplies which will not be paid
for separately but shall be included in the work:
A. A separate, temperature controlled facility of at least 300 square feet usable space. This facility shall
be used exclusively for the molding, storage and testing of concrete test specimens as required. This
facility shall be provided in addition to other facilities required in Section 620. The storage facility
shall have sufficient water storage capacity for curing all required test specimens. The storage facility
shall provide separate storage tanks for each type of required testing. Each storage tank shall have a
continuously recording thermometer and sufficient blank charts for the project. Temperatures of each
storage tank shall be recorded for the duration of the project.
B. A machine for testing flexural strength of concrete specimens. The machine shall be used only for
flexural strength tests. The machine shall be model number FX-250 manufactured by Forney with a
DR2001 digital monitor or an approved equal. Both the Contractor and the Engineer will use this
machine for testing concrete specimens. The machine shall meet the requirements of AASHTO T 97
and T 22 and the following: The machine and the flexural strength assembly shall be of a rigid
construction. The applied vertical load shall be uniformly distributed to the third points and uniformly
across the width of the beam (transverse distribution). Uniform distribution of the load is defined as
less than a 3 percent variation in the load between each of the nine strain gages placed in the middle
third section of the tension face for loads from 1,000 to 10,000 pounds. One firm that can evaluate
and assess the ability of the machine to distribute the load evenly is KPFF Consulting Engineers,
Chicago Illinois 847-859-7790 (Paul Okamoto). Other firms may be capable of evaluating and
assessing the load distribution of the machine. The Engineer must approve the firm prior to assessing
the machine. The machine shall be ready for use and certified two days before paving begins. After
the machine has been certified and accepted by the Engineer it shall not be moved until all portland
cement concrete paving and flexural strength acceptance tests have been completed.
C. Beam molds for molding all test specimens required. This shall include all testing described in
subsection 106.06.
7. Reporting and Record Keeping. The Contractor shall report the results of the tests to the Engineer in
writing at least once per day.
The Contractor shall assemble a Quality Control (QC) notebook and update it daily. This notebook shall
contain all worksheets, test results forms, test results charts and quality level charts for each of the
elements listed in Table 106-2 or 106-3. The Contractor shall submit examples of worksheets, test result
forms and test results charts in accordance with CP 12B as part of the Contractor's Quality Control Plan
(QCP). The Contractor shall submit the QC notebook to the Engineer for review once a month on the
date agreed to at the Pre-Construction Conference.
The QC notebook will be returned to the Contractor with a list of recognized deficiencies within two
working days after submittal. Deficiencies may include, but are not limited to, the failure to submit the
notebook on time or an absence of the required reports. For any month in which deficiencies are
identified, the QC notebook will be submitted for review two weeks after the QC notebook is returned.
May 2, 2013
6
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Upon the second recognized deficiency the Engineer will notify the Contractor, and the pay estimate shall
be withheld until the Contractor submits, in writing, a report detailing the cause for the recognized
deficiency. The report shall include how the Contractor plans to resolve the deficiencies. Additional
recognized deficiencies will result in a delay of the pay estimate until the Contractor has identified and
resolved the deficiency along with revising and resubmitting his QCP to address these issues. Once the
Engineer has reviewed and approved the revised QCP the estimate may be paid. Upon submittal of the
QC notebook for the semi-final estimate, the QC notebook shall become the property of the Department.
The Contractor shall make provisions such that the Engineer can inspect quality control work in progress,
including QC notebook, sampling, testing, plants, and the Contractor's testing facilities at any time.
8. Optimized Gradation. The Contractor will be required to perform quality control testing of the combined
aggregate gradation (CAG) when an Optimized Gradation (OG) is used for Class E or P Concrete. The
combined aggregate gradation testing frequency shall be three per day. Test one shall be sampled and
tested after full production begins but before production reaches 100 cubic yards. Test two shall be
sampled and tested after four hours of continuous production or production reaches 1000 cubic yards,
whichever comes first. Test three shall be sampled and tested after seven hours of continuous production
or production reaches 1750 cubic yards, whichever comes first. The frequency shall be a minimum of one
per day if production is less than 750 cubic yards.
The Department will perform one gradation each day that may be a split of one of the three daily QC
samples. This data will not be used to determine acceptability of the material but as information only.
The Contractor’s gradation test data will be used to calculate the coarseness factor (CF) and workability
factor (WF) and must plot within the workability box. No corrective action shall be required if the data falls
within the workability box.
When the Contractor’s gradation test results and the CF and WF fall outside the workability box, the
Contractor shall immediately make corrections to bring the aggregate gradation within the workability box
and notify the Engineer. If two or more consecutive test results for any single day or two successive days
are found to fall outside the workability box, the Contractor shall immediately suspend production and
provide a written corrective plan to the Engineer for approval prior to resuming production.
Upon being allowed to resume production, the Contractor shall follow the daily sampling frequency. If the
next two consecutive gradation tests indicate the CF and WF plot inside the workability box, the
Contractor may continue production. If the first two aggregate samples do not have CF and WF that fall
inside the workability box, production shall be suspended.
Prior to resuming production the Contractor shall be required to sample the individual aggregate
stockpiles at two or more locations to determine the range of variability within each stockpile, make
appropriate adjustments to the percentages for each aggregate component, and discharge and sample
the combined aggregates. The combined aggregate gradation shall be tested to determine if the CF and
WF fall inside the workability box. Production can resume if the CF and WF plot within the workability box.
Production will continue to be suspended for additional evaluation of stockpiles and aggregate feed rates
until gradation sampling and testing indicate the CF and WF fall inside the workability box.
All gradation test information during production shall be provided to the Engineer daily. The Contractor
shall immediately report all gradation test data to the Engineer for evaluation during periods when
production is suspended or upon resuming production. The Contractor will be notified in writing in all
cases when production may resume or shall remain suspended.
(b) Acceptance Testing. Acceptance testing frequencies shall be in accordance with the Schedule (Quality
Assurance) in the Department’s Field Materials Manual. Except for flexural strength, acceptance tests will be
conducted by and at the expense of the Department. Acceptance sampling and testing procedures will be in
accordance with the Department's Field Materials Manual with the following exceptions and inclusions:
May 2, 2013
7
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
A split sample from an acceptance test shall not be used for a quality control test. The Engineer will
designate the location where samples are to be taken. Samples shall be taken by the Contractor in
accordance with CP 61. The Engineer will be present during the sampling and take possession of all
acceptance samples. Samples transported in different containers will be combined and mixed before molding
specimens. All materials are subject to inspection and testing at all times.
Pavement thickness acceptance will be determined by cores.
The compressive strength test for acceptance will be the average compressive strength of three test cylinders
cast in plastic molds from a single sample of concrete and cured under standard laboratory conditions prior to
testing. If the compressive strength of any one specimen differs from the average by more than 10 percent,
that specimen will be deleted and the average strength will be determined using the remaining two
specimens. If the compressive strength of more than one specimen differs from the average by more than 10
percent the average strength will be determined using all three specimens. Each set of three cylinders will be
tested at 28 days after molding.
Acceptance tests for flexural strength shall be the Contractor's quality control tests. The flexural strength
tests shall be the average flexural strength of four test beams. The test beams shall be prepared according to
AASHTO T 23 with the following additional requirements: Specimens shall be consolidated by internal
vibration without the vibrator being inserted in the center six inches of the specimen's long dimension.. The
flexural strength of each specimen shall be measured according to AASHTO T 97 with the following additional
requirements: If the flexural strength of only one specimen differs from the average by more than 10 percent,
that specimen shall be deleted and the average strength shall be determined using the remaining three
specimens. If the flexural strength of more than one specimen differs from the average by more than 10
percent, the test value shall be the average of all four specimens. Each set of four beams shall be tested at
28 days after molding. Leather shims shall be used in each test.
(c) Verification Testing. Verification testing will be used only when flexural strength criteria is indicated and is the
responsibility of the Department. The Department will determine the locations where samples or
measurements are to be taken. The location of sampling shall be based on a stratified random procedure.
Verification sampling and testing procedures will be in accordance with Sections 105, 106, 412, the Schedule
for Minimum Materials Sampling, Testing and Inspection in the Department's Field Materials Manual, and CP
13. Samples for verification testing shall be taken by the Contractor in accordance with CP 61 in the
presence of the Engineer.
An analysis of test results will be performed after all test results are known using the t-test and F-test
statistical methods with an alpha value set at 0.05. If either the above t-test and F-test analysis shows a
significant difference, then the following items shall be checked: comparison of beam fracture locations and
types, computations and flexural testing machine outputs, curing tank temperature charts, slump and air
contents, plant batch tickets for major changes, review of sampling, molding, testing procedures, along with
IAT check tests and any other investigations that may clarify the significant differences. If after a review of the
data no reasons can be determined for the significant difference, the Department's test data shall be used for
determining Quality Levels and Incentive or Disincentive according to the methods in this Section.
(d) Check Testing. The Contractor and the Engineer shall conduct a check testing program (CTP) prior to the
placement of any concrete pavement. The check testing program will include a conference directed by the
Region Materials Engineer, the Contractor's testers and the Department's testers concerning methods,
procedures and equipment for compressive or flexural strength testing. Check testing shall be completed
before any portland cement concrete pavement is placed. A set of three cylinders or four beams will be
molded by both the Contractor and the Department's project testers from a split sample. The specimens will
be sampled, molded and cured for seven days and tested for compressive or flexural strength according to
the procedures of Section 106. The Department's Independent Assurance Tester will also mold, cure and
test a set of three cylinders or four beams, but the Independent Assurance Test results will not be entered in
the check testing analysis. If the results of the check tests do not meet the following criteria, then the check
testing will be repeated until the following criteria are met:
May 2, 2013
8
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
(1) The average of the Contractor's test results and the average of the Department's test results shall be
within 10 percent of the average of all test results.
(2) Each specimen test result shall be within 15 percent of the average of all test results.
When compressive strength criteria is indicated, a check test must also be conducted on the sand equivalent
test. A set of 5 sand equivalents will be run by both the Contractor's and the Department's project tester, from
a split sample. The average of the absolute differences between tests taken by the quality control personnel
and the acceptance testing personnel will be compared to the acceptable limits shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13.
The CTP will be continued until the acceptance and quality control test results are within the permissible
ranges shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13.
During production, split samples of randomly selected acceptance tests will be compared to the permissible
ranges shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13. The minimum frequency will be as shown in Table 106-3.
If production has been suspended and then resumed, the Engineer may order a CTP between tests taken by
quality control and acceptance testing persons to assure the test results are within the permissible ranges
shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13. Check test results shall not be included in quality control testing. The Region
Materials Engineer shall be called upon to resolve differences if a CTP shows unresolved differences beyond
the ranges shown in Table 13-1 of CP 13.
(e) Independent Assurance Testing. Independent Assurance Tests (IAT) for flexural strength will be performed at
a frequency of 1 per 50,000 sq. yds. The sample for the IAT will be a split sample of the Contractor's quality
control test. The Department's representative performing verification tests shall also use a split sample of the
Contractor's quality control test and participate in the IAT. The IAT for flexural strength will be the average
flexural strength of four test beams prepared according to the requirements of Section 106 and cured for
seven days.
(f) Testing Schedule. All samples used to determine Incentive or Disincentive payment by quality level formulas
in accordance with Section 105, will be selected by a stratified random process.
Table 106-2
TESTING SCHEDULE - ITEM 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVEMENT, FLEXURAL STRENGTH CRITERIA
Element Minimum Testing Frequency
Contractor's Quality Control
Aggregate Gradation
and Sand Equivalent
For the first five days, minimum of 1/day, then
1/10,000 sq. yds. After 5 days, 1/40,000 sq. yds.
Slump First three loads each day, then as needed for control.
Water Cement Ratio First three loads each day, then 1/500 cu. yds.
Air Content and Yield Minimum of 1/day, then 1/2,500 sq. yds.
Flexural Strength Minimum of 1/day, then 1/2,500 sq. yds.
Compressive Strength 1/10,000 sq. yds.
Pavement Thickness In accordance with subsection 412.21.
Pull Test Joints
Minimum of six transverse and six longitudinal joint
locations for the 1st 2500 linear feet, then three
transverse and three longitudinal joints thereafter
Load Transfer Dowel
Bar Placement In accordance with subsection 412.13 (b) 2
Tining Depth 1 per 528 linear feet in each lane and shoulder wider
than 8 feet.
May 2, 2013
9
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Table 106-3
TESTING SCHEDULE - ITEM 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVEMENT, COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CRITERIA
Subsection 412.10 shall include the following:
The Contractor shall provide a MIT-Scan-2 which is manufactured by MIT GmbH.
The Contractor shall ensure the MIT-Scan-2 is calibrated for the specific dowel bar size or load transfer device
being placed, and is operating within the manufacturer’s tolerances. The Contractor shall also ensure that the
operator of the MIT-Scan-2 is fully competent in the use of the device. The Contractor shall supply the serial
number of the device to be utilized on the project.
In subsection, 412.13 (a) 3rd
paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace with the following:
Holes with a diameter 1/4 inch greater than the bar diameter shall be drilled laterally into the hardened concrete
slabs at one half the slab depth, 36 inches on center, 15 to 16 inches deep.
In subsection 412.13 (a), delete the 5th paragraph and replace with the following:
When tie bars are placed in plastic state concrete or drilled and epoxied into a construction joint, and if required
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate by testing at least 15 of the tie bars that the bar pullout
resistance is at least 11,250 pounds with slippage of 1/16 inch or less. If two or more tie bars do not meet the
required pullout resistance, then another 15 tie bars shall be tested. If any of the second 15 do not meet the
required pullout resistance, then all remaining tie bars shall be tested. The Contractor shall perform additional
pullout tests and take corrective action when and as directed. All steps taken to test bars, and to correct, repair or
replace failed tie bars and the surrounding failed area shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Concrete strength
shall have a compressive strength of at least 2500 psi before testing. ASTM E488 shall be used for performing
pullout testing..
Delete subsection 412.13 (b) 1 and 412.13 (b) 2 and replace with the following:
1. Longitudinal Weakened Plane Joints. Epoxy coated deformed steel tie bars shall be inserted into the plastic
state concrete after the auger. In the event the tie bars are placed behind the machine paving mold, vibration will
be required during placement. Other methods of bar placement may be acceptable if the Contractor can
demonstrate satisfactory performance of the alternate method. Proposals of alternate methods or additional costs
Element Minimum Testing Frequency
Contractor's Quality Control
Aggregate Gradation Minimum of 1/day, then 1/10,000 sq. yds.
Slump First three loads each day, then as needed for control.
Compressive Strength,
Air Content, Yield, and
Sand Equivalent
Minimum of 1/day, then 1/2,500 sq. yds.
Pavement Thickness In accordance with subsection 412.21.
Pull Test Joints
Minimum of six transverse and six longitudinal joint
locations for the 1st 2500 linear feet, then three
transverse and three longitudinal joints thereafter
Load Transfer Dowel
Bar Placement In accordance with subsection 412.13 (b) 2
Tining Depth 1 per 528 linear feet in each lane and shoulder wider
than 8 feet.
Water Cement Ratio First three loads each day, then 1/500 cu. yds.
May 2, 2013
10
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
associated with other methods shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Tie bars shall be placed according to a
method approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall use an MIT Scan-2 to evaluate the location of tie bars
that cannot be visually inspected. Each longitudinal joint located within the dowel bar test locations described in
subsection 412.13 (b) 2 that were not visually inspected shall be evaluated with the MIT Scan-2. The MIT Scan-2
shall be calibrated for the tie bar size placed. The tie bars shall be located within the middle third of the slab, and
a minimum of ½ inch below the saw cut. Tie bars shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches on each side of
the joint. The weakened plane joint shall be made by sawing in hardened concrete in accordance with the plan
details.
Tie bars that are cut during sawing operations shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. Tie bars that are
located less than 2 inches above the bottom of the slab shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. Tie bars
that are not embedded a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the joint shall be replaced. When the spacing
between two in-place tie bars exceeds 40 inches but less than 72 inches, a tie bar will be installed halfway
between the two tie bars, unless this installation location is within 12 inches of a transverse weakened plane joint.
When the spacing between two in-place tie bars exceeds 72 inches, tie bars will be installed at an even spacing
not to exceed 36 inches, but shall not be installed within 12 inches of a transverse weakened plane joint. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a method for replacing the tie bars. The Contractor shall not proceed to
replace the tie bars until the method for replacement has been approved by the Engineer.
2. Transverse Weakened Plane Joints. When dowel bars are specified in the Contract, they shall be installed
within the tolerances and of the size, grade, and spacing specified. Horizontal support wires or shipping braces
shall be non-deformed bars or wires with a diameter less than or equal to 0.307 inches (gauge 0 wire). The
number of horizontal support wires or shipping braces shall be limited to five per assembly. The horizontal
support wires or shipping braces shall not be cut prior to concrete placement. The center of the dowel assembly
or the insertion location shall be marked on both sides of the pavement slab for reference in sawing the joint.
Dowel bars shall be furnished in a rigid welded assembly or placed by a dowel bar insertion (DBI) machine.
When a DBI is used, the Contractor shall submit details and specifications of the proposed slip-form paver and
DBI to the Engineer a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the Concrete Pavement Pre-Paving Conference. The
Contractor shall detail his methodology for ensuring correct marking of dowel bar insertion points and correct
sawing of the joints. The Contractor shall ensure that the slip-form paver is compatible with the DBI.
The rigid assembly shall be fabricated from number 1/0 wire or heavier with vertical support wires every 1 foot.
Assembly shall be securely fastened to the subbase and constructed to firmly hold all the dowel bars at T/2 depth,
parallel to each other and to the pavement grade and alignment.
See Standard Plan M-412-1 for schematic describing the measurement of each tolerance.
.A weighted-score system will be used to conduct a joint-by-joint evaluation of rotational misalignments of the
dowel bars. The Joint Score is a measure of the combined effects of rotational misaligned dowel bars at a joint. A
Joint Score is determined by summing the product of the weights (given in Table 412-1) and the number of bars in
each misalignment category and adding 1. For example, if a joint has four misaligned bars in the 0.6 to 0.8 inch
range, the joint score is 9; if a joint has one misaligned bar in the range 0.6 to 0.8 inch and one bar in the 1 to 1.5
inch range, the score is 8. A Joint Score of 10 is the critical level, above which the risk of joint locking is
considered high.
May 2, 2013
11
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Table 412-1
WEIGHTING FACTORS USED TO DETERMINE JOINT SCORE
Range of Rotational
Misalignment Weight
< 0.6 in. 0
≥ 0.6 in and < 0.8 in. 2
≥ 0.8 in and < 1 in. 4
≥ 1 in 5
Individual Dowel Bar Rejection Criteria:
Rotational Alignment:
Any bar with a misalignment greater than 1.5 in.
Longitudinal (side) shift:
Any bar that is not embedded at least 6 inches on each side of the joint
Depth:
Any bar within the top 3 inches of the pavement or at a depth less than the saw-cut depth.
Any bar within the bottom 3 inches of the pavement
When rigid assemblies are used to install dowel bars and the bars are rejected for depth, the Contractor may core
the pavement to verify the MIT Scan depth results.
Joint Rejection Criteria:
Any joint with a Joint Score greater than 10. An individual joint may be allowed if the two longitudinally
adjacent joints each have a joint score less than or equal to 10
Any joint that does not have at least three acceptable dowel bars in each wheel path.
May 2, 2013
12
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Corrective Measures: The following corrective measures will be allowed for the bars or joints that are rejected.
Rotational misalignment.
Saw-cut the misaligned bars. Joints with less than three un-cut bars in each wheel path will require
the addition of dowel bars using an approved dowel bar retrofit method.
Longitudinal (side) Shift and missing bars.
Addition of dowel bars using an approved dowel bar retrofit method.
Depth.
Inadequate cover above the bar—Remove the bar and install a replacement bar using an approved
dowel bar retrofit method.
Inadequate cover below the bar— Addition of dowel bars using an approved dowel bar retrofit
method.
Retrofitted dowel bars shall not exceed the dowel bar rejection criteria.
In addition to the above procedures, the Contractor may propose removal and replacement of the affected slabs.
The Contractor shall submit his method of repair to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall demonstrate his ability to place dowel bars in conformance with the specifications by
placement of a test section.
The test section shall be a minimum of 300 feet in length. Upon completion of the test section, the Contractor
shall shut down paving operations. During the shutdown period, the Contractor shall evaluate all joints in the test
section using the MIT-Scan-2, analyze the results and submit the results to the Engineer. Paving operations shall
not be restarted until the Engineer approves the test section results. The test section will be found acceptable if
85% of the dowel bars placed are found to be within the rejection criteria. All dowel bars exceeding the Rejection
Criteria must be addressed using the above corrective measures.
If the Project has less than 500 linear feet of pavement, the test section will not be required. If a Project does not
have sections of continuous pavement greater than 45 linear feet, the test section will not be required.
Upon completion of the test section(s) and for each week of production, the Contractor shall prepare an electronic
report generated using MagnoProof software and submit it to the Engineer at the start of each working week
during production for the previous weeks work. All data shall be submitted in the manufacturer’s native file
format, along with the calibration files.
The electronic report shall include the following:
(1) Contract number, date, highway number and direction of traffic.
(2) Joint number, lane number and station.
(3) Bar number and x-location of dowel bar.
(4) Horizontal and vertical misalignment of each bar in inches.
(5) Overall misalignment of each bar in inches of each bar
(6) Side shift of each bar in inches.
(7) Depth to center of each bar in inches.
(8) Joint Score
(9) All measurements exceeding the rejection criteria shall be highlighted in red.
Due to potential magnetic interference from tie bars, dowel bars located within 15 inches of a tied joint shall not be
included in the evaluation.
May 2, 2013
13
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
When the test section is found to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall perform corrective actions and place a
second test section. If the second test section is found to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall pave no more
than 500 feet per day until an acceptable test section has been achieved.
Once a test section is successfully completed, Dowel Bar Placement testing frequency shall be a minimum of one
location per 1,250 linear feet of each continuous lane including climbing lanes, passing lanes, acceleration and
deceleration lanes and ramps. Sections greater than 45 linear feet and less than 1,250 linear feet require a
minimum one of test location. . Testing locations shall be determined by a random procedure so that each area
has a randomly selected transverse joint location. At each location, five consecutive joints shall be tested.
Sections of continuous pavement constructed by the project less than 45 linear feet will not require Dowel Bar
Placement Testing.
When any joint score is greater than10 or any one bar in a single joint exceeds the rejection criteria, joints shall be
tested in each direction from the rejected joint, until two consecutive joints in each direction are found to be within
the rejection criteria.
All delays or costs associated with equipment being rejected for use by the Engineer will not be paid for by the
Department, and will be considered a Non-excusable Delay in accordance with subsection 108.08 (c) 2.
When concrete shoulders or widenings are constructed subsequent to the driving lanes, transverse weakened
plane joints shall immediately be formed in the plastic concrete of these widenings to create an extension of the
existing transverse joint. This tooled joint shall be formed in such a manner that it controls the cracking and shall
be sawed and sealed in accordance with the above requirements.
In subsection 412.21, delete the first sentence in the sixth paragraph.
In subsection 601.02, delete Class E and P Concrete from Table 601-1 and replace with the following:
Concrete
Class
Required
Field
Compressive
Strength
(psi)
Cementitious
Material
Content:
Minimum or
Range
(lbs/yd3
Air
Content:
% Range
(Total)
)
Water
/Cementitious
Material Ratio:
Maximum or
Range
E 4500 at 28
days 520 4 – 8 0.44
P 4500 at 28
days 520 4 – 8 0.44
In subsection 601.02, delete the sixth and ninth paragraphs and replace with the following:
Class E concrete is used for fast track pavements needing early strength in order to open a pavement to service
soon after placement. Class E concrete shall meet the requirements of Class P concrete. ASTM C150 Type III or
ASTM C1157 Type HE cement may be used.
Class P concrete is used in pavements. Additional requirements are: The laboratory trial mix shall produce a
minimum average 28 day flexural strength 700 psi. Two aggregate gradation options are available:
(a) Standard Gradation (SG). The concrete mix shall consist of a minimum 55 percent AASHTO M 43 size
May 2, 2013
14
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
(b) Optimized Gradation (OG). Aggregate proportions must be a result of an optimized combined aggregate
gradation (CAG) developed by an approved mix design technique such as Shilstone or KU Mix. The
amount of aggregate in the CAG passing the 19 mm (¾ inch) sieve and retained on the12.5 mm (½ inch)
sieve shall be a minimum of 8 percent for the trial mix design. The coarseness factor (CF) and workability
factor (WF) must plot within the workability box (ABCD) depicted graphically by the following 4 coordinate
points:
a. Point A> (CF,WF) 72, 31
b. Point B> (CF,WF) 44.5, 35
c. Point C> (CF,WF) 44.5, 43.5
d. Point D> (CF,WF) 72, 40
Figure 601-1
CF = (S / T) x 100
Where:
S = Percent Cumulative Retained on 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) Sieve
T = Percent Cumulative retained on 2.36 mm (No. 8) Sieve
WF is the percent passing the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve. Increase workability factor by 2.5 percentage points
for every 94 pounds per cubic yard of cementitious material used in excess of 564 pounds per cubic yard
in the mix design. Decrease workability factor by 2.5 percentage points for every 94 pounds per cubic
yard of cementitious material used below 564 pounds per cubic yard in the mix design. Do not adjust the
workability factor if the amount of cementitious material is 564 pounds per cubic yard.
Subsection 601.05 shall include the following in the second paragraph:
(8) Class P concrete with an OG shall indicate the gradation proportions that results in a combined aggregate
gradation corresponding to compliance within the specified CF and WF box and shall include the
following charts used to perform aggregate gradation analysis:
(i) Coarseness Factor
(ii) Workability Factor
(iii) 0.45 power
(iv) Combined gradation
Delete Subsection 601.06 (10) and (11) and replace with the following:
(10) Weights of fine and coarse aggregates or combined weight when an OG is pre-blended
(11) Moisture of fine and coarse aggregates or combined moisture when an OG is pre-blended
Subsection 601.06 (c) shall include the following:
May 2, 2013
15
REVISION OF SECTIONS 105, 106, 412, 601 AND 709
CONFORMITY TO THE CONTRACT OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT,
DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS FOR JOINTS
Aggregates for Class P concrete using an OG, a combination of aggregates (stockpiled separately) shall be
combined prior to the stationary charging drum to meet the approved CAG.
In subsection, 709.03, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
709.03 Dowel Bars and Tie Bars. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284
and shall be grade 60, epoxy-coated, and deformed. Bar size shall be as designated on the Standard Plan M-
412-1.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 106
CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE AND
CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS
Section 106 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 106.12, delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
The original Certificate of Compliance shall include the Contractor’s original signature as directed above. The
original signature (including corporate title) on the Certificate of Compliance, under penalty of perjury, shall be of a
person having legal authority to act for the manufacturer. It shall state that the product or assembly to be
incorporated into the project has been sampled and passed all specified tests in conformity to the plans and
specifications for this project. One legible copy of the fully signed Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished to
the Engineer prior to installation of material. The original shall be provided to the Engineer before payment for the
represented item will be made.
In subsection 106.13, delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Certified Test Report shall be a legible copy or an original document and shall include the Contractor’s
original signature as directed above. The signature (including corporate title) on the Certified Test Report, under
penalty of perjury, shall be of a person having legal authority to act for the manufacturer or the independent
testing laboratory. It shall state that the test results show that the product or assembly to be incorporated into the
project has been sampled and passed all specified tests in conformity to the plans and specifications for this
project. One legible copy or original document of the fully signed Certified Test Report shall be furnished to the
Engineer prior to installation of material. Failure to comply may result in delays to the project or rejection of the
materials.
May 2, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 107
PROJECT PAYROLLS
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 107.01 shall include the following:
As related to the Form FHWA 1273, Required Contract Provisions Federal-Aid Construction Contracts, the
Contractor shall check all Contractor and subcontractor project payrolls regarding accuracy of pay classification,
pay hours, and pay rates. The Contractor shall sign and date all payrolls signifying this check has been
performed.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 107
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS,
INSURANCE TYPES AND COVERAGE LIMITS
Section 107 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 107.15(c) and replace it with the following:
(c) Each insurance policy shall include provisions preventing cancellation or non-renewal without at least 30 days
prior notice to Contractor. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer any such notice received within seven
days of the Contractor’s receipt of such notice.
1 May 2, 2013
REVISION OF SECTIONS 107 and 208
WATER QUALITY CONTROL
UNDER ONE ACRE OF DISTURBANCE
Sections 107, 208, are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 107.25(b)6 delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Contractor shall record the location of potential pollutants on the plans. Descriptions of the potential
pollutants shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
In subsection 208.03 delete the first paragraph and replace it with the following:
Prior to construction the Contractor shall implement BMPs in accordance with the approved project schedule as
described in subsection in 208.03(b).
In subsection 208.03 delete the third, fourth, and fifth paragraphs and replace them with the following:
The Contractor shall evaluate all non-stormwater coming onto the site, such as springs, seeps, and landscape
irrigation return flow. If such flow is identified, BMPs shall be used to protect off-site water from becoming
contaminated with sediment or other pollutants.
The Contractor shall review existing inlets and culverts to determine if inlet protection is needed due to water flow
patterns. Prior to beginning construction, inlets and culverts needing protection shall be protected and the
location of the implemented BMP added to the plans.
When additional BMPs are required and approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall implement the additional
BMPs and shall record and describe them on the plans. The approved BMPs will be measured and paid for in
accordance with subsections 208.11 and 208.12.
Delete subsections 208.03(c) and (d) and replace them with the following:
(c) Implementation, Maintenance and Revision of the SWMP.
The Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows:
(1) Install, construct, and maintain all BMPs specified in the Contract and coordinate the construction of
BMPs with all other construction operations.
(2) Implement suitable temporary erosion and sediment control features as necessary to correct
unforeseen conditions or emergency situations. Dismantle those features when their purpose has been
fulfilled unless the Engineer directs that the features be left in place.
(3) Implement necessary actions to reduce anticipated or presently existing water quality or erosion
problems resulting from construction activities.
(4) Make available, all labor, material, and equipment needed to install, maintain, and remove BMPs.
(5) When included in the Contract, the Contractor shall assign to the project an individual to serve in the
capacity of Erosion Control Supervisor (ECS). The ECS may be the Superintendent. The ECS shall
be experienced in all aspects of construction and have satisfactorily completed an ECS training
program authorized by the Department. Proof that this requirement has been met shall be submitted to
the Engineer prior to or at the preconstruction conference. A list of authorized ECS training programs
will be provided by the Engineer upon request by the Contractor. The ECS shall be the person
responsible for ensuring that the responsibilities listed in (1) through (4) above are fulfilled
(d) Documentation Available on the Project. The following Contract documents and references will be made
available for reference in one location on the project during construction.
1. Project Documents. The following documents shall be kept, maintained, and updated in a single notebook:
(1) SWMP Sheets
(2) SWMP site map, if applicable to the project.
(3) Details of BMPs used on the project not covered in Standard Plan M-208-1.
(4) List of potential pollutants as described in subsection 107.25.
(5) SPCC and reports of reportable spills submitted to CDPHE.
(6) Form 105s and all other correspondence relating to water quality.
(7) Project environmental permits and associated applications and certifications.
2 May 2, 2013
REVISION OF SECTIONS 107 and 208
WATER QUALITY CONTROL
UNDER ONE ACRE OF DISTURBANCE
2. Reference Materials
(1) CDOT Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide.
(2) CDOT Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Field Guide.
(3) Copy of biological opinion, if applicable.
In subsection 208.04 delete the first and second paragraphs and replace them with the following:
The Contractor shall modify the SWMP to clearly describe and locate all BMPs implemented at the site to control
potential sediment discharges from vehicle tracking.
Vehicle tracking pads shall be used at all vehicle and equipment access points to the site to prevent sediment
exiting the project site onto paved public roads. Access shall be provided only at locations approved by the
Engineer.
Delete subsection 208.04(e) and replace it with the following:
(e) Stabilization. Once earthwork has begun on a section, it shall be pursued until completion.
Clearing and grubbing operations shall be scheduled and performed so that grading operations and final
stabilization measures can follow immediately thereafter if the project conditions permit. Otherwise temporary
stabilization measures shall be taken between successive construction stages. Additional work required
because the Contractor has failed to properly coordinate the entire erosion control schedule, thus causing
previously seeded areas to be disturbed by operations that could have been performed prior to the seeding
shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.
In subsection 208.06 delete the first paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Contractor shall clearly describe and record on the SWMP, all practices implemented at the site to minimize
impacts from procedures or significant material that could contribute pollutants to runoff. Areas or procedures
where potential spills can occur shall have spill contingency plans in place as specified in subsections 107.25(b)6
or 208.06(c).
In subsection 208.07 delete the second paragraph and replace it with the following:
Erodible stockpiles (including topsoil) shall be contained with acceptable BMPs at the toe (or within 20 feet of the
toe) throughout construction. BMPs shall be approved by the Engineer.
In subsection 208.08, delete the first paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Contractor shall limit construction activities to those areas within the limits of disturbance shown on the plans
and cross-sections. Construction activities, in addition to the Contract work, shall include the on-site parking of
vehicles or equipment, on-site staging, on-site batch plants, haul roads or work access, and all other action which
would disturb existing conditions. Off road staging areas must be pre-approved by the Engineer, unless otherwise
designated in the Contract. Construction activities beyond the limits of disturbance due to Contractor negligence
shall be restored to the original condition by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall
tabulate additional disturbances not identified in the SWMP and indicate locations and quantities on the SWMP
and report to the Engineer.
In subsection 208.09, second paragraph, delete the list and replace it with the following:
(1) Failure to include erosion control in the project schedule or failure to include erosion control in each
schedule update as specified in subsection 208.03(b).
(2) Failure of the Contractor to implement necessary actions required by the Engineer as required by
subsection 208.03(c).
(3) Failure to amend SWMP and implement BMPs as required by subsection 208.04.
(4) Failure to keep documentation and records current.
(5) Failure to construct or implement erosion control or spill containment measures required by the Contract, or
failure to construct or implement them in accordance with the Contractor’s approved schedule as required
by subsection 208.06(c).
3 May 2, 2013
REVISION OF SECTIONS 107 and 208
WATER QUALITY CONTROL
UNDER ONE ACRE OF DISTURBANCE
(6) Failure to stabilize disturbed areas as required by subsections 208.04(e) and 208.08.
(7) Failure to replace or perform maintenance on an erosion control feature after notice from the Engineer to
replace or perform maintenance as required by subsection 208.04(f).
(8) Failure to remove and dispose of sediment from BMPs as required.
(9) Failure to install and properly utilize a concrete washout structure for containing washout from concrete
placement operations.
(10) Failure to perform permanent stabilization as required by subsection 208.04 (e).
In subsection 208.09 delete the third paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Engineer will immediately notify the Contractor in writing of each incident of failure to perform erosion control
in accordance with the Specifications, including, but not limited to items (1) through (10) above. Correction shall
be made as soon as possible but no later than 48 hrs from the date of notification to correct the failure. The
Contractor will be charged liquidated damages in the amount of $875 for each calendar day after the 48 hour
period has expired, that one or more of the incidents of failure to perform items (1) through (10) above, remains
uncorrected.
In subsection 208.09 delete the eighth and ninth paragraphs and replace them with the following:
Disagreements regarding the suggested corrective action for a BMP compliance issue between the Project
Engineer and Superintendent, shall be discussed with the Resident Engineer and Region Water Pollution Control
Manager. If after meeting the Contractor is still in disagreement and feels that additional compensation is owed,
the Contractor will follow the decision of the Project Engineer, keep track of the costs and negotiate further with
the Project Engineer. If after pursuing the issue, the Contractor is unable to reach agreement with the Project
Engineer, then the Contractor can follow the dispute process outlined in subsection 105.22.
If the Contractor’s corrective action plan and schedule are not submitted and approved within 48 hours of the Stop
Work Order or the corrective action plan is not implemented by the Contractor, the Engineer will have an on-site
meeting with the Superintendent and the Superintendent’s supervisor. This meeting will also be attended by the
Resident Engineer, the Region Water Pollution Control Manager, and the Region Program Engineer. This
meeting will identify and document needed corrective actions and a schedule for completion. If after the meeting,
the unacceptable work is not remedied within the schedule as agreed to in the meeting, the Engineer will take
action to effect compliance with the Contract by utilizing CDOT Maintenance personnel or other non-Contractor
forces and deduct the cost from any moneys due or to become due to the Contractor pursuant to subsection
105.16. Delays due to these Stop Work Orders shall be considered nonexcusable. The Stop work Order shall be
in place until the project is in Contract compliance.
Delete subsection 208.10 and replace it with the following:
208.10 Items to Be Accomplished Prior to Final Acceptance.
(a) Reclamation of Washout Areas. After concrete operations are complete, washout areas shall be reclaimed in
accordance with subsection 208.05(n) at the Contractor’s expense.
(b) Survey. The Contractor shall survey Permanent Water Quality BMPs (Permanent BMPs) on the project after
they are constructed and confirm they are at final configuration and grade. The Engineer will identify which
Permanent BMPs shall be surveyed prior to the final walk through. The survey shall be performed in
accordance with Section 625.
(c) Removal of Temporary BMPs. Temporary BMPs subject to removal shall be determined by the Engineer at a
final walk through of the project and shall be removed by the Contractor. If any BMPs are left in place, the
Region’s Water Pollution Control Manager shall be notified of the BMP locations.
August 19, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 108
CRITICAL PATH METHOD
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 108.03 shall include the following:
The Bar Chart or Initial Schedule shall be submitted at least 10 working days prior to the start of the work. The
Engineer’s review of the Schedule will not exceed two working days. Work shall not begin until the Schedule is
accepted in writing, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer
In subsection 108.03 (c), delete the third paragraph.
May 2, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 108
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 108.09 delete the schedule of liquidated damages and replace with the following:
Original Contract Amount ($) Liquidated Damages per Calendar Day ($)
From More Than To And Including
0 250,000 400
250,000 500,000 700
500,000 1,000,000 1,100
1,000,000 2,000,000 1,600
2,000,000 4,000,000 2,500
4,000,000 10,000,000 3,300
10,000,000
---------------
3,300 plus 200 Per Each Additional 1,000,000
Contract Amount or Part Thereof Over
10,000,000
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 108
SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT
Section 108 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 108.01 and replace with the following:
108.01 Subletting of Contract. The Contractor shall not sublet, sell, transfer, assign, or dispose of the Contract
or Contracts, or any portion thereof without written permission of the Engineer. Prior to beginning any work by
subcontractor, the Contractor shall request permission from the Engineer by submitting a completed Sublet
Permit Application, CDOT Form No. 205. The subcontract work shall not begin until the Contractor has received
the Engineer’s written permission. The Contractor shall make all project related written subcontracts, agreements,
and purchase orders available to the Engineer for viewing, upon request and at a location convenient to the
Engineer.
The Contractor will be permitted to sublet a portion of the Contract, however, the Contractor’s organization shall
perform work amounting to 30 percent or more of the total original contract amount. Any items designated in the
contract as “specialty items” may be performed by subcontract. The cost of “specialty items” so performed by
subcontract may be deducted from the total original contract amount before computing the amount of work
required to be performed by the Contractor’s own organization. The original contract amount includes the cost of
material and manufactured products which are to be purchased or produced by the Contractor and the actual
agreement amounts between the Contractor and a subcontractor. Proportional value of a subcontracted partial
contract item will be verified by the Engineer. When a firm both sells material to a prime contractor and performs
the work of incorporating the materials into the project, these two phases shall be considered in combination and
as constituting a single subcontract.
The calculation of the percentage of subcontracted work shall be based on subcontract unit prices.
Subcontracts or transfer of Contract shall not release the Contractor of liability under the Contract and Bond.
April 5, 2013
1
REVISION OF SECTION 109
ASPHALT CEMENT COST ADJUSTMENT
(ASPHALT CEMENT INCLUDED IN THE WORK)
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 109.06 shall include the following:
(i) Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustments. Contract cost adjustments will be made to reflect increases or decreases
in the monthly average price of asphalt cement from the average price for the month preceding the month in
which bids were received for the Contract. These cost adjustments are not a change to the contract unit
prices bid.
1. Cost adjustments will be based on the asphalt cement price index established by the Department and
calculated as shown in subsection 109.06(i) 2.D below. The index will be the average for the month of
the daily postings of the spot price per barrel of Flint Hills Resources daily crude oil posting, as published
on http://www.fhr.com/refining/crude_oil.aspx. The index from this source will be converted to US Dollars
using the currency converter at http://finance.yahoo.com/currency; the posted price of Canadian Dollars
per cubic meter of WCS on fhr.com will be converted to US Dollars per cubic meter. A conversion factor
of 0.89 cubic meter per Ton will be used to convert the posted price from cubic meter to tons. The
converted daily prices and the average index number for the month will be posted as soon as they are
available on the CDOT website at:
http://www.coloradodot.info/business/designsupport/construction-specifications/2011-Specs/asphalt-
cement-cost-adjustment
2. Cost adjustments will be made on a monthly basis subject to the following conditions:
A. Adjustment will be based on the pay quantities on the monthly partial pay estimate for the following
two pay items when measured by the ton and asphalt cement is included in the pay items:
Item No. Item Pay Unit
403* Hot Mix Asphalt (Grading __) (Asphalt) Ton
403 Stone Matrix Asphalt (Grading __)
(Asphalt)
Ton
*Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) is not subject to asphalt cement cost adjustment.
B. A cost adjustment will be made only when the asphalt cement price index varies by more than 5
percent from the asphalt cement price index at the time of bid, and only for that portion of the
variance in excess of 5 percent. Cost adjustments may be either positive or negative dollar
amounts.
C. Asphalt cement cost adjustments will not be made for any partial estimate falling wholly after the
expiration of contract time.
D. Adjustment formula:
EP greater than BP:
ACCA = (EP – 1.05 BP)(PA) (Q)
EP less than BP:
ACCA = (EP – 0.95 BP) (PA) (Q)
April 5, 2013
2
REVISION OF SECTION 109
ASPHALT CEMENT COST ADJUSTMENT
(ASPHALT CEMENT INCLUDED IN THE WORK)
Where:
BP = Average Asphalt Cement price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar
month in which bids are opened
EP = Average Asphalt Cement price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar
month in which the partial estimate pay period ends
ACCA = Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment
PA = Percent of the paving mixture that is asphalt cement. Asphalt Cement content will be
determined by the weighted average of all asphalt cement content percentages
obtained from the field acceptance tests for that item (Use decimal in formula, e.g.:
0.05.). If Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP), Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles (RAS), or
both is used, the percent of Virgin Asphalt Cement added to the mix will be determined
by subtracting the percent of asphalt cement in the RAP, RAS, or both from the percent
of asphalt cement in the mix as calculated from Revision of Section 401, Reclaimed
Asphalt Pavement and Revision of Section 401 Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles.
Q = Increased pay quantity for all 403 items shown above on the monthly partial pay
estimate in Tons.
Example: Bids are opened on July 16. The BP will be the average of the daily postings for June
1 through June 30. For an estimate cut-off date selected by the Contractor at the Pre-
Construction Conference of the 20th of the month a February estimate will include HMA
quantities measured from the 21st of January through the 20th
of February, and the EP
index used to calculate ACCA will be the average of the daily postings for January 1
through January 31 as established by CDOT)
E. Cost adjustment will not be made for the quantity of any item that is left in place at no pay or for
material removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
F. Cost adjustments will not be made to items of work added to the Contract by Change Order after
the award of the Contract.
G. The asphalt cement cost adjustment will be the sum of the individual adjustments for each of the
pay items shown above. No adjustment will be made for asphalt cement costs on items other than
those shown above.
H. Asphalt cement cost adjustments resulting in an increased payment to the Contractor will be paid
for under the planned force account item: Asphalt Cement Cost Adjustment. Asphalt cement cost
adjustments resulting in a decreased payment to the Contractor will be deducted from monies owed
the Contractor.
May 5, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
COMPENSATION FOR COMPENSABLE DELAYS
In subsection 109.10, delete the first two paragraphs and replace with the following:
109.10 Compensation for Compensable Delays. If the Engineer determines that a delay is compensable in
accordance with either subsection 105.22, 105.23, 105.24, or 108.08, monetary compensation will be determined
in accordance with this subsection.
(a) These categories represent the only costs that are recoverable by the Contractor. All other costs or
categories of costs are not recoverable:
(1) Actual wages and benefits, including FICA, paid for additional labor not otherwise included in (5) below;
(2) Costs for additional bond, insurance and tax;
(3) Increased costs for materials;
(4) Equipment costs calculated in accordance with subsection 109.04(c) for Contractor owned equipment
and based on invoice costs for rented equipment;
(5) Costs of extended job site overhead;
(6) Costs of salaried employees not otherwise included in (1) or (5) above incurred as a direct result of the
delay;
(7) Claims from subcontractors and suppliers at any level (the same level of detail as specified herein is
required for all such claims);
(8) An additional 16 percent will be added to the total of items (1) through (7) as compensation for items for
which no specific allowance is provided, including profit and home office overhead.
1
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
FUEL COST ADJUSTMENT
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Subsection 109.06 shall include the following:
(h) Fuel Cost Adjustments. Contract cost adjustments will be made to reflect increases or decreases in the
monthly average prices of gasoline, diesel and other fuels from the average price for the month preceding the
month in which bids were received for the Contract. These cost adjustments are not changes to the Contract
unit prices bid. When bidding, the Contractor shall specify on the Form 85 whether the cost adjustment will
apply to the Contract. After bids are submitted, the Contractor will not be given any other opportunity to
accept or reject this adjustment. If the Contractor fails to indicate a choice on the Form 85, the cost
adjustment will not apply to the Contract. If the fuel cost adjustment is accepted by the Contractor, the
adjustment will be made in accordance with the following criteria:
1. Cost adjustments will be based on the fuel price index established by the Department and calculated as
shown in subsection 109.06(h)2.D below. The index will be the monthly average of the rates posted by
the Oil Price Information Service (OPIS) for Denver No. 2 Diesel. The rate used will be the OPIS Average
taken from the OPIS Standard Rack table for Ultra-Low Sulfur w/Lubricity Gross Prices (ULS column),
expressed in dollars per gallon and rounded to two decimal places.
2. Cost adjustments will be made on a monthly basis subject to the following conditions:
A. Adjustment will be based on the pay quantities on the monthly partial pay estimate for each of the pay
items listed in the table below for which fuel factors have been established. Adjustment will be made
only when the pay item is measured by the pay unit specified in the table:
Item Pay Unit Fuel Factor (FF)
202-Removal of Asphalt Mat (Planing) Square Yard 0.006 Gal/SY/Inch depth
203-Excavation (muck, unclassified) Embankment,
Borrow
Cubic Yard 0.29 Gal/CY
203-Rock Excavation Cubic Yard 0.39 Gal/CY
206-Structure Excavation and Backfill [applies only
to quantities paid for by separate bid item; no
adjustment will be made for pay items that include
structure excavation & backfill, such as RCP(CIP)]
Cubic Yard 0.29 Gal/CY
304-Aggregate Base Course (Class___) Cubic Yard 0.85 Gal/CY
304-Aggregate Base Course (Class___) Ton 0.47 Gal./Ton
307-Processing Lime Treated Subgrade Square Yard 0.12 Gal/SY
310-Full Depth Reclamation Square Yard 0.06 Gal/SY
403-Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) (Grading __) * Ton 2.47 Gal/Ton
403-Stone Matrix Asphalt (Grading __) Ton 2.47 Gal/Ton
405-Heating and Scarifying Treatment Square Yard 0.44 Gal/SY
405-Heating and Repaving Treatment Square Yard 0.44 Gal/SY
405-Heating and Remixing Treatment Square Yard 0.44 Gal/SY
406-Cold Bituminous Pavement (Recycle) Square Yard 0.01 Gal/SY/Inch depth
412- Concrete Pavement (___Inch) Square Yard 0.03 Gal/SY/Inch thickness
412-Place Concrete Pavement** Square Yard 0.03 Gal/SY/Inch thickness
*Hot Mix Asphalt (Patching) is not subject to fuel cost adjustment.
**Use the thickness shown on the plans.
2
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 109
FUEL COST ADJUSTMENT
B. A fuel cost adjustment will be made only when the current fuel price index varies by more than 5
percent from the price index at the time of bid, and only for that portion of the variance in excess of 5
percent. Fuel cost adjustments may be either positive or negative dollar amounts.
C. Fuel cost adjustments will not be made for any partial estimate falling wholly after the expiration of
contract time.
D. Adjustment formula:
EP greater than BP:
FA = (EP – 1.05 BP)(Q)(FF)
EP less than BP:
FA = (EP – 0.95 BP)(Q)(FF)
Where:
BP = Average fuel price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar month in which bids
are opened
EP = Average fuel price index for the calendar month prior to the calendar month in which the
partial estimate pay period ends
FA = Adjustment for fuel costs in dollars
FF = Fuel usage factor for the pay item
Q = Pay quantity for the pay item on the monthly partial pay estimate
Note: When the pay item is based on area, and the rate of fuel use varies with thickness, Q
should be determined by multiplying the area by the thickness. For example: for 1000
square yards of 8-inch concrete pavement Q should be 8000.
Example: Bids are opened on July 16. The BP will be the average of the daily postings for June 1
through June 30. For an estimate cut-off date selected by the Contractor at the Pre-
Construction Conference of the 20th of the month a February estimate will include HMA
quantities (Q) measured from the 21st of January through the 20th
of February, the FF will
be 2.47 Gal/Ton, and the EP index used to calculate FA will be the average of the daily
postings for January 1 through January 31 as established by CDOT.
E. Fuel cost adjustment will not be made for the quantity of any item that is left in place at no pay.
F. Fuel cost adjustments will not be made to items of work added to the Contract by Change Order after
the award of the Contract.
The fuel cost adjustment will be the sum of the individual adjustments for each of the pay items shown. No
adjustment will be made for fuel costs on items other than those shown. The factors shown are aggregate
adjustments for all types of fuels used, including but not limited to gasoline, diesel, propane, and burner fuel.
No additional adjustments will be made for any other type of fuel.
Fuel cost adjustments resulting in an increased payment to the Contractor will be paid for under the planned
force account item: Fuel Cost Adjustment. Fuel cost adjustments resulting in a decreased payment to the
Contractor will be deducted from monies owed the Contractor.
February 3, 2011
1
REVISION OF SECTION 109
MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 109.01, delete the 17th
paragraph and replace it with the following:
Vehicles used to haul material being paid for by weight shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. Each of
these vehicles shall be weighed empty daily at times directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer, in writing, a vehicle identification sheet that lists the following for each delivery vehicle to be used on the
project:
(1) identification mark
(2) vehicle length
(3) tare weight
(4) number of axles
(5) the distance between extreme axles
(6) information related to legal weight, including the Permit No. and permitted weight of each vehicle for which the
State has issued an overweight permit.
This information shall be furnished prior to time of delivery of the material and at any subsequent time the
Contractor changes vehicles, combination vehicles, axle length relationships, or overweight permitting of vehicles.
January 6, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 109
MEASUREMENT OF WATER
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 109.01, delete the twenty-sixth paragraph and replace with the following:
Water may be measured either by volume or weight. Water meters shall be accurate within a range of ± 3
percent. When water is metered, the Contractor shall use an approved metering device and shall furnish the
Engineer a certificate showing the meter has been accurately calibrated within the time allowed in the following
schedule:
2 inch 4 years
4 inch to 6 inch 2 years
8 inch to 10 inch 1 year
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 109
PROMPT PAYMENT
Section 109 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised to include the following:
Subsection 109.06 (e) shall include the following:
The Contractor shall submit the Form 1418, Monthly Payment Report, along with the project schedule updates, in
accordance with subsections 108.03 (b) or 108.03 (c) (3). Failure to submit a complete and accurate Form 1418
shall be grounds for CDOT to withhold subsequent payments or retainage to the Contractor.
July 19, 2012
1
REVISION OF SECTIONS 203, 206, 304 AND 613
COMPACTION
Sections 203, 304 and 613 of Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 203.03 (a), delete the fifth paragraph and replace with the following:
1. Soil Embankment. Soil embankment consists of materials with 50 percent or more of the material passing the
4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
A soil embankment may also have more than 50 percent of the material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4)
sieve, but no more than 30 percent of the material retained on the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve.
Soil embankment shall be constructed with moisture density control in accordance with the requirements of
subsection 203.07.
2. Rock Embankment. Rock embankment consist of materials with 50 percent or more of the material retained on
the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and with more than 30 percent of the material retained on the 19 mm (3/4 inch)
sieve. All material shall be smaller than 6 inches. Rock embankments shall be constructed without moisture
density control in accordance with the requirements of subsection 203.08.
Delete Subsection 203.07 and replace with the following:
203.07 Construction of Embankment and Treatment of Cut Areas with Moisture and Density Control. Soil
embankments shall be constructed with moisture and density control and the soil upon which the embankments
are to be constructed shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches and compacted with moisture and density control.
The moisture content of the soil at the time of compaction shall be as specified or directed.
The material shall be removed from the full width of roadbed in all cut sections to the designated depth. The soil
below the designated depth shall be thoroughly scarified to a depth of 6 inches and the moisture content
increased or reduced, as necessary, to obtain the moisture content specified. This scarified layer shall then be
compacted to the relative compaction specified.
All embankment material shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent relative compaction. Maximum dry
density of all soil types encountered or used will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T 99 as modified by
CP 23.
Soils shall be compacted at ± 2 percent of Optimum Moisture Content (OMC) as determined by AASTHO T 99.
Soils having greater than 35 percent passing the 75 µm (No. 200) sieve shall be compacted to 0 to 3 percent
above OMC. Soils which are unstable at the above moisture content shall be compacted at lower moisture
content to the specified density.
Additional work involved in drying embankment material to the required moisture content shall be included in the
contract price paid for excavating or furnishing the material with no additional compensation.
Density requirements will not apply to materials which cannot be tested in accordance with the above procedures
for determining maximum dry density. Compaction for materials which cannot be tested shall be in accordance
with subsection 203.08.
Claystone or soil-like non-durable shale shall be pulverized and compacted to the specified moisture and percent
of relative compaction and shall be compacted with a heavy tamping foot roller, weighing at least 30 tons. Each
tamping foot roller shall protrude from the drum a minimum of 4 inches. Each embankment layer shall receive a
minimum of three or more coverages with the tamping foot roller to obtain density. One coverage consists of one
pass over the entire surface designated. One pass consists of the passing of an acceptable tamping foot roller
over a given spot. The roller shall be operated at a uniform speed not exceeding 3 miles per hour. No additional
compensation will be made for additional roller coverages to achieve specified density requirements.
July 19, 2012
2
REVISION OF SECTIONS 203, 206, 304 AND 613
COMPACTION
In subsection 206.03, delete the fourth and fifth paragraphs and replace with the following:
Backfill shall consist of approved materials uniformly distributed in layers brought up equally on all sides of the
structure. Each layer of backfill shall not exceed 6 inches before compacting to the required density and before
successive layers are placed. Structure backfill (Class 1) shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95
percent of maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180 as modified by CP 23. Backfill
shall be compacted at ± 2 percent of Optimum Moisture Content (OMC).
Structure backfill (Class 2) shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density.
The maximum dry density and OMC for A-1, A-2-4. A-2-5 and A-3 materials will be determined in accordance with
AASHTO T 180 as modified by CP 23. The maximum dry density and OMC for all other materials will be
determined in accordance with AASHTO T 99 as modified by CP 23. Materials shall be compacted at ± 2percent
of Optimum Moisture Content (OMC). Materials having greater than 35 percent passing the 75 µm (No. 200)
sieve shall be compacted at 0 to 3 percent above OMC.
In subsection 304.06, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
304.06 Shaping and Compaction. Compaction of each layer shall continue until a density of not less than 95
percent of the maximum density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180 as modified by CP 23 has been
achieved. The moisture content shall be at +/-2 percent of optimum moisture content. The surface of each layer
shall be maintained during the compaction operations so that a uniform texture is produced and the aggregates
are firmly keyed. Moisture conditioning shall be performed uniformly during compaction.
In subsection 613.07, delete the 15th
paragraph and replace with the following:
Trenching shall be backfilled and compacted as follows: Backfill shall be deposited in uniform layers. The
thickness of each layer shall be 6 inches or less thick prior to compaction. The space under the conduit shall be
completely filled. The remainder of the trench and excavation shall be backfilled to the finished grade. The backfill
material shall be compacted to the density of not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density. The maximum
dry density and optimum moisture content (OMC) for A-1, A-2-4. A-2-5 and A-3 materials will determined in
accordance with AASHTO T 180 as modified by CP 23. The maximum dry density and OMC for all other
materials will determined in accordance with AASHTO T 99 as modified by CP 23. Materials shall be compacted
at ± 2percent of Optimum Moisture Content (OMC). Materials having greater than 35 percent passing the 75 µm
(No. 200) sieve shall be compacted at 0 to 3 percent above OMC. Each layer shall be mechanically compacted by
tamping with power tools approved by the Engineer. Compaction methods or equipment that damage the conduit
shall not be used.
July 29, 2011
REVISION OF SECTIONS 206 AND 601
BACKFILLING STRUCTURES THAT
SUPPORT LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES
Sections 206 and 601 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 206.03, delete the ninth paragraph and replace with the following:
Backfill material shall not be deposited against newly constructed masonry or concrete structures, until the
concrete has developed a compressive strength of 0.8 f 'c, except in cases where the structures support lateral
earth pressure. Concrete compressive strength for structures supporting lateral earth pressure shall conform to
subsection 601.12 (o).
Subsection 601.12 shall include the following:
(o) Backfilling Structures that Support Lateral Earth Pressure. Concrete compressive strengths shall reach f'c
before backfilling operations can begin with heavy equipment, such as skid-steers or self-powered riding
compactors. Concrete compressive strengths shall reach 0.8 f'c before backfilling operations can begin with
hand operated equipment.
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 208
AGGREGATE BAG
Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 208.02 delete (l) and replace with the following:
(l) Aggregate Bag. Aggregate bags shall consist of crushed stone or recycled rubber filled fabric with the
following properties:
Diameter (inches) Weight (minimum)
(pounds per foot)
6-8 6
10 10
12 15
Rubber used in bags shall be clean, 95 percent free of metal and particulates.
Crushed stone contained in the aggregate bags shall conform to subsection 703.09, Table 703-7 for Class C.
The aggregate bag shall consist of a woven geotextile fabric with the following properties:
Property Requirement Test Method
Grab Tensile Strength 90 lbs. min. ASTM D 4632
Trapezoid Tear Strength 25 lbs. min. ASTM D 4533
Mullen Burst 300 psi ASTM D 3786
Ultraviolet Resistance 70% ASTM D 4355
Subsection 208.12 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Aggregate Bag Linear Foot
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 208
EROSION LOG
Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 208.02, delete (h) and replace with the following:
(h) Erosion log. Shall be one of the following types unless otherwise shown on the plans:
(1) Erosion Log (Type 1) shall be curled aspen wood excelsior with a consistent width of fibers evenly
distributed throughout the log. The casing shall be seamless, photo-degradable tube netting and shall
have minimum dimensions as shown in Table 208-1, based on the diameter of the log called for on the
plans. The curled aspen wood excelsior shall be fungus free, resin free, and free of growth or
germination inhibiting substances.
(2) Erosion Log (Type 2) shall consist of a blend of 30-40 percent weed free compost and 60-70 percent
wood chips. The compost/wood blend material shall pass a 50 mm (2 inch) sieve with a minimum of 70
percent retained on the 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) sieve and comply to subsection 212.02 for the remaining
compost physical properties. The compost/wood chip blend may be pneumatically shot into a geotextile
cylindrical bag or be pre-manufactured. The geotextile bag shall consist of material with openings of 3/8
inches of HDPE mesh, and contain the compost/wood chip material while not limiting water infiltration.
Erosion log (Type 1 and Type 2) shall have minimum dimensions as shown in Table 208-1, based on the diameter
of the log.
Table 208-1
NOMINAL DIMENSIONS OF EROSION LOGS
Diameter Length (feet) Weight (minimum)
(pounds/foot)
Stake
Dimensions
(Inches)
Min. Max.
9 inch 10 180 1.6 1.5 by 1.5 (nominal)
by 18
12 inch 10 180 2.5 1.5 by 1.5(nominal)
by 24
20 inch 10 100 4.0 2 by 2 (nominal)
by 30
Stakes to secure erosion logs shall consist of pinewood or hardwood.
Subsection 208.11 shall include the following:
All BMPs measured by the linear foot shall be determined along the centerline of the BMP. Measured length will
not include required overlap.
July 19, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 250
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
Section 250 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 250.03, delete the second and third paragraphs and replace with the following:
This project may be in the vicinity of property associated with petroleum products, heavy metal based paint,
landfill, buried foundations, abandoned utility lines, industrial area or other sites which can yield hazardous
substances or produce dangerous gases. These hazardous substances or gases can migrate within or into the
construction area and could create hazardous conditions. The Contractor shall use appropriate methods to
reduce and control known landfill, industrial gases, and visible emissions from asbestos encounters and
hazardous substances which exist or migrate into the construction area. The Contractor shall follow CDOT’s
Asbestos-Contaminated Soil Management Standard Operating Procedure, dated August 22, 2011 for proper
handling of asbestos-contaminated soil, and follow all applicable Solid and Hazardous Waste Regulations for
proper handling of soils encountered that contain any other substance mentioned above.
Encountering suspected contaminated material, including groundwater, old foundations, building materials,
demolition debris, or utility lines that may contain asbestos or be contaminated by asbestos, is possible at some
point during the construction of this project. When suspected contaminated material, including groundwater, is
encountered or brought to the surface, the procedures under subsection 250.03(d) shall be followed.
In subsection 250.07 delete, (d) and replace with the following:
(d) CDOT’s Asbestos-Contaminated Soil Management Standard Operating Procedure, dated August 22, 2011.
Asbestos contaminated soil shall be managed in accordance with 6 CCR 1007-2, Section 5, Asbestos Waste
Management Regulations. Regulations apply only upon discovery of asbestos materials during excavation
and soil disturbing activities on construction projects, or when asbestos encounters are expected during
construction. The contractor shall comply with procedures detailed in the CDPHE’s Asbestos-Contaminated
Soil Guidance Document and CDOT’s approved Asbestos-Contaminated Soil Management Standard
Operating Procedure, dated August 22, 2011, including the following minimum requirements:
(1) Immediate actions and implementation of interim controls to prevent visible emissions, exposure, and
asbestos contamination in surrounding areas.
(2) Soil Characterization.
(3) Training required for all personnel involved in excavation and other soil disturbing activities, once
asbestos is encountered during construction or on projects where asbestos encounters are expected.
Training must be given by a Certified Asbestos Inspector or Certified Asbestos Abatement Designer with
a minimum of six months experience inspecting asbestos contaminated soil.
(4) Assessment for the presence and extent, within the proposed area of disturbance, of asbestos
discoveries, whether expected or unexpected, by a Certified Asbestos Inspector.
(5) Investigation and sampling required for risk assessment and management. Investigation, if required,
shall be conducted by a Certified Asbestos Inspector.
(6) Risk assessment and determinations for further management or abatement.
(i) Risk assessment and determinations must be made by a Certified Asbestos Inspector, and
coordinated with the Engineer.
(ii) Soil remediation is not necessarily required, depending on the circumstances.
(7) Submit 24-hour Notification of Unplanned Asbestos Discovery.
(8) Submit 10-day Notification of Planned Asbestos Management.
April 26, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 401
COMPACTION OF HOT MIX ASPHALT
Section 401 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 401.17, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
401.17 Compaction. The hot mix asphalt shall be compacted by rolling. Both steel wheel and pneumatic tire
rollers will be required. The number, weight, and type of rollers furnished shall be sufficient to obtain the required
density while the mixture is in a workable condition. Compaction shall begin immediately after the mixture is
placed and be continuous until the required density is obtained. When the mixture contains unmodified asphalt
cement (PG 58-28 or PG 64-22) or modified (PG 58-34), and the surface temperature falls below 185 °F, further
compaction effort shall not be applied unless approved, provided the Contractor can demonstrate that there is no
damage to the finished mat. If the mixture contains modified asphalt cement (PG 76-28, PG 70-28 or PG 64-28)
and the surface temperature falls below 230 °F, further compaction effort shall not be applied unless approved,
provided the Contractor can demonstrate that there is no damage to the finished mat.
Warm Mix Asphalt compaction requirements shall conform to CP 59.
In subsection 401.17, delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:
SMA shall be compacted to a density of 93 to 97 percent of the daily theoretical maximum specific gravity,
determined according to CP 51. All other HMA shall be compacted to a density of 92 to 96 percent of the daily
theoretical maximum specific gravity, determined according to CP 51. If more than one theoretical maximum
specific gravity test is taken in a day, the average of the theoretical maximum specific gravity results will be used
to determine the percent compaction. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with CP 44 or 81.
In subsection 401.17, second to last paragraph, delete the first sentence and replace with the following:
After production paving work has begun, a new Roller Pattern shall be demonstrated when a ch ange in the
compaction process is implemented.
July 19, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 401
COMPACTION PAVEMENT TEST SECTION (CTS)
Section 401 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 401.17, delete the fifteenth paragraph and replace with the following:
Two sets of random cores shall be taken within the last 200 tons of the CTS. Each set shall consist of seven
random cores. The Engineer will determine the coring locations using a stratified random sampling process. The
locations of these cores will be such that one set can serve as a duplicate of the other. One set of these cores
shall be immediately submitted to the Engineer. This set will be used for determining acceptance of the CTS and
determining density correction factors for nuclear density equipment. Densities of the random samples will be
determined by cores according to CP 44. Density correction factors for nuclear density equipment will be
determined according to CP 81. Coring shall be performed under CDOT observation. Coring will not be
measured and paid for separately but shall be included in the work. For SMA, a CTS is not used. The Contractor
shall follow the requirements for the demonstration control strip in accordance with the Revision of Section 403,
Stone Matrix Asphalt Pavement.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 401
TEMPERATURE SEGREGATION
Section 401 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 401.16 delete the twelfth (last) paragraph and replace it with the following:
The Engineer may evaluate the HMA for low density due to temperature segregation any time industry best
practices, as detailed on Form 1346, are not being followed or the Engineer suspects temperature segregation is
occurring. The Engineer will first meet with the Contractor to discuss the paving practices that are triggering the
temperature investigation. Areas across the mat, excluding the outside 1 foot of both edges of the mat, that are
more than 25 °F cooler than other material across the width may be marked for density testing. Material for
temperature comparison will be evaluated in 3-foot intervals behind the paver across the width of the mat. The
material shall be marked and tested in accordance with CP 58. If four or more areas within a lot of 500 tons have
densities of less than 93 percent of the material’s maximum specific gravity for SMA mixes or less than 92 percent
of the material’s maximum specific gravity for all other HMA mixes, a 5 percent price disincentive will be applied to
the 500 ton lot. The 500 ton count begins when the Engineer starts looking for cold areas, not when the first cold
area is detected. This price disincentive will be in addition to those described in Sections 105 and 106. Only one
area per delivered truck will be counted toward the number of low density areas. Temperature segregation
checks will be performed only in areas where continuous paving is possible.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 412
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FINISHING
Section 412 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 412.12(a) and replace it with the following:
(a) Hand Finishing. Hand finishing should be minimized wherever possible. The Engineer shall be notified prior
to hand finishing work and the proposed hand finished work shall be addressed in the Quality Control Plan for
concrete finishing. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only under the
following conditions. Hand finished concrete shall be struck off and screeded with a portable screed that is at
least 2 feet longer than the maximum width of the slab to be struck off. It shall be sufficiently rigid to retain its
shape. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by hand vibrators. Hand finishing shall not be allowed after
concrete has been in-place for more than 30 minutes or when initial set has begun unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer. Finishing tools made of aluminum shall not be used.
The Contractor shall provide a Quality Control Plan (QCP) to ensure that proper hand finishing is
accomplished in accordance with current Industry standards in the concrete pavement placement. It shall also
identify the Contractor’s method for ensuring that the provisions of the QCP are met. The QCP shall be
submitted to the Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference. Paving operations shall not begin until the
Engineer has approved the QCP. The QCP shall identify and address issues affecting the quality of finished
concrete pavement including but not limited to:
(1) Timing of hand finishing operations
(2) Methodology to place and transport concrete
(3) Equipment and tools to be utilized
(4) Qualifications and training of finishers and supervisors
When the Engineer determines that any element of the approved QCP is not being implemented or that hand
finished concrete is unacceptable, work shall be suspended. The Contractor shall supply a written plan to
address improperly placed material and how to remedy future hand finishing failures and bring the work into
compliance with the QCP. The Engineer will review the plan for acceptability prior to authorizing the
resumption of operations.
May 5, 2011
REVISION OF SECTIONS 412, 601 AND 711
LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS
FOR CURING CONCRETE
Sections 412, 601 and 711 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 412.14, first paragraph, delete the second sentence and replace with the following:
The impervious membrane curing compound shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type 2 and shall be
volatile organic content (VOC) compliant.
In subsection 601.13 (b), first paragraph, delete the second sentence and replace with the following:
A volatile organic content (VOC) compliant curing compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 2 shall be used on
surfaces where curing compound is allowed, except that Type 1 curing compound shall be used on exposed
aggregate or colored concrete, or when directed by the Engineer.
In subsection 601.16 (a) 1., delete the first sentence and replace with the following:
1. Membrane Forming Curing Compound Method. A volatile organic content (VOC) compliant curing compound
conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 2 shall be uniformly applied to the surface of the deck, curbs and sidewalks
at the rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet.
Delete subsection 711.01 and replace with the following:
711.01 Curing Materials. Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements:
Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenaf AASHTO M 182
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete
ASTM C 309
Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete AASHTO M 171*
*Only the performance requirements of AASHTO M171 shall apply.
Straw used for curing shall consist of threshed straw of oats, barley, wheat, or rye. Clean field or marsh hay may
be substituted for straw when approved by the Engineer. Old dry straw or hay which breaks readily in the
spreading process will not be accepted.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE BATCHING
Section 601 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 601.06, delete (13) and (17) and replace with the following:
(13) Gallons of water added by truck operator, the time the water was added and the quantity of concrete in the
truck each time water is added.
(17) Water to cementitious material ratio.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTIONS 601
CONCRETE FINISHING
Section 601of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 601.12 (a) delete the fifth paragraph and replace it with the following:
Water shall not be added to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations.
Hand finishing should be minimized wherever possible. The hand finishing methods shall be addressed in the
Quality Control Plan for concrete finishing. Hand finished concrete shall be struck off and screeded with a portable
screed that is at least 2 feet longer than the maximum width of the surface to be struck off. It shall be sufficiently
rigid to retain its shape. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by hand vibrators. Hand finishing shall not be
allowed after concrete has been in-place for more than 30 minutes or when initial set has begun. Finishing tools
made of aluminum shall not be used.
The Contractor shall provide a Quality Control Plan (QCP) to ensure that proper hand finishing is accomplished in
accordance with current Industry standards. It shall identify the Contractor’s method for ensuring that the
provisions of the QCP are met. The QCP shall be submitted to the Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference.
Concrete placement shall not begin until the Engineer has approved the QCP. The QCP shall identify and
address issues affecting the quality finished concrete including but not limited to:
(1) Timing of hand finishing operations
(2) Methodology to place and transport concrete
(3) Equipment and tools to be utilized
(4) Qualifications and training of finishers and supervisors
When the Engineer determines that any element of the approved QCP is not being implemented or that hand
finished concrete is unacceptable, work shall be suspended. The Contractor shall supply a written plan to address
improperly placed material and how to remedy future hand finishing failures and bring the work into compliance
with the QCP. The Engineer will review the plan for acceptability prior to authorizing the resumption of operations.
In subsection 601.14(a) delete the fourth paragraph.
July 28, 2011
1
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE FORM AND FALSEWORK REMOVAL
Section 601 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 601.09, delete (h) and replace with the following:
(h) Removal of Forms. The forms for any portion of the structure shall not be removed until the concrete is
strong enough to withstand damage when the forms are removed.
Unless specified in the plans, forms shall remain in place for members that resist dead load bending until concrete
has reached a compressive strength of at least 80 percent of the required 28 day strength, 0.80f’c. Forms for
columns shall remain in place until concrete has reached a compressive strength of at least 1,000 psi. Forms for
sides of beams, walls or other members that do not resist dead load bending shall remain in place until concrete
has reached a compressive strength of at least 500 psi.
Forms and supports for cast-in-place concrete box culverts (CBCs) shall not be removed until the concrete
compressive strength exceeds 0.6 fc′ for CBCs with spans up to and including 12 feet, and 0.67 fc
′ for CBCs with
spans exceeding 12 feet but not larger than 20 feet. Forms for CBCs with spans larger than 20 feet shall not be
removed until after all concrete has been placed in all spans and has attained a compressive strength of at least
0.80f’c.
Concrete compressive strength shall be determined using information concrete cylinders or by maturity meters.
At the pre-pour conference, the Contractor shall submit the method of determining the structure’s strength and the
location where information cylinders will be taken or maturity meters placed.
If information cylinders are used they shall be cast by the Contractor and cured in the same manner as the
structure. A set of information cylinders shall be taken for each concrete placement on the structure. A set of
information cylinders shall be taken for any load of concrete that is being placed at the mid-span of beams and at
support locations and other locations as directed by the Engineer. Casting of the information cylinders will be
witnessed by the Engineer. The information cylinders shall remain in the molds and cured in the same manner as
the structure until they are tested in the laboratory by the Engineer. Compressive strength shall be determined
using the compressive strength of at least two information cylinders. The contractor shall be responsible for
protecting the information cylinders from damage.
Prior to placement of concrete whose strength will be determined with maturity meters, the Contractor shall
provide the Engineer a report of maturity relationships in accordance with CP 69. The Contractor shall provide
maturity meters and all necessary wires and connectors. The Contractor shall be responsible for the placement
and maintenance of the maturity meter and wire. . At a minimum a maturity meter will be placed at the mid-span
of beams and at support locations. Placement shall be as directed by the Engineer.
For structures with multiple sets of information cylinders or maturity meters, the lowest compressive strength shall
determine when the forms can be removed.
Acceptance cylinders shall not be used for determining compressive strength to remove forms.
When field operations are controlled by information cylinder tests or maturity meter, the removal of forms,
supports and housing, and the discontinuance of heating and curing may begin when the concrete is found to
have the required compressive strength.
Forms for median barrier, railing or curbs, may be removed at the convenience of the Contractor after the
concrete has hardened.
All forms shall be removed except permanent steel bridge deck forms and forms used to support hollow
abutments or hollow piers when no permanent access is available into the cells. When permanent access is
provided into box girders, all interior forms and loose material shall be removed, and the inside of box girders
shall be cleaned.
July 28, 2011
2
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE FORM AND FALSEWORK REMOVAL
In subsection 601.11, delete (e) and replace with the following:
(e) Falsework Removal. Unless specified in the plans or specifications, falsework shall remain in place until
concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of 0.80f’c.
Falsework supporting any span of a simple span bridge shall not be released until after all concrete, excluding
concrete above the bridge deck, has attained a compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Falsework supporting any span of a continuous or rigid frame bridge shall not be released until after all concrete,
excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has been placed in all spans and has attained the compressive
strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Falsework for arch bridges shall be removed uniformly and gradually, beginning at the crown, to permit the arch to
take its load slowly and evenly.
Falsework supporting overhangs and deck slabs between girders shall not be released until the deck concrete
has attained a compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Falsework for pier caps which will support steel or precast concrete girders shall not be released until the
concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c. Girders shall not be erected onto such pier caps
until the concrete in the cap has attained the compressive strength of at least 0.80f’c.
Falsework for cast-in-place prestressed portions of structures shall not be released until after the pre-stressing
steel has been tensioned.
Concrete compressive strength shall be determined using information concrete cylinders or by maturity meters.
At the pre-pour conference, the Contractor shall submit the method of determining the structure’s strength and the
location that information cylinders will be taken or maturity meters placed.
If information cylinders are used they shall be cast by the Contractor and cured in the same manner as the
structure. A set of information cylinders shall be taken for each concrete placement on the structure. A set of
information cylinders shall be taken for any load of concrete that is being placed at the mid-span of beams and at
support locations and other locations as directed by the Engineer. Casting of the information cylinders will be
witnessed by the Engineer. The information cylinders shall remain in the molds and cured in the same manner as
the structure until they are tested in the laboratory by the Engineer. Compressive strength shall be determined
using the compressive strength of at least two information cylinders. The Contractor shall be responsible for
protecting the information cylinders from damage.
Prior to placement of concrete whose strength will be determined with maturity meters, the Contractor shall
provide the Engineer a report of maturity relationships in accordance with CP 69. The Contractor shall provide
maturity meters and all necessary wires and connectors. The Contractor shall be responsible for the placement
and maintenance of the maturity meters and wires. At a minimum a maturity meter will be placed at the mid-span
of beams and at support locations. Placement shall be as directed by the Engineer.
For structures with multiple sets of information cylinders or maturity meters, the lowest compressive strength shall
determine when the falsework can be removed.
Acceptance cylinders shall not be used for determining compressive strength to remove falsework.
July 29, 2011
1
REVISION OF SECTION 601
CONCRETE SLUMP ACCEPTANCE
Section 601 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete the fifth paragraph of Subsection 601.05 and replace with the following:
Except for Class BZ concrete, the slump of the delivered concrete shall be the slump of the approved concrete
mix design plus or minus 2.0 inch. The laboratory trial mix must produce an average compressive strength at
least 115 percent of the required field compressive strength specified in Table 601-1. When entrained air is
specified in the Contract for Class BZ concrete, an air entraining admixture may be added to an approved Class
BZ mix design. A new trial mix will not be required.
Delete Subsection 601.17 (b), 601.17 (d) and Table 601-3 and replace with the following:
(b) Slump. Slump acceptance, but not rejection, may be visually determined by the Engineer. Any batch that
exceeds the slump of the approved concrete mix design by 2.0 inches will be retested. If the slump is
exceeded a second time, that load is rejected. If the slump is greater than 2 inches lower than the approved
concrete mix design, the load can be adjusted with a water reducer, or by adding water (if the w/cm allows)
and retested.
Portions of loads incorporated into structures prior to determining test results which indicate rejection as the
correct course of action shall be subject to reduced payment or removal as determined by the Engineer.
(d) Pay Factors. The pay factor for concrete which is allowed to remain in place at a reduced price shall be
according to Table 601-3 and shall be applied to the unit price bid for Item 601, Structural Concrete.
If deviations occur in air content and strength within the same batch, the pay factor for the batch shall be the
product of the individual pay factors.
Table 601-3
PAY FACTORS
Percent Total Air Strength
Deviations
From
Specified
Air
(Percent)
Pay
Factor
(Percent)
Below
Specified
Strength (psi)
[ < 4500 psi
Concrete]
Pay
Factor
(Percent)
Below
Specified
Strength (psi)
[ ≥ 4500 psi
Concrete]
0.0-0.2 98 1-100 98 1-100
0.3-0.4 96 101-200 96 101-200
0.5-0.6 92 201-300 92 201-300
0.7-0.8 84 301-400 84 301-400
0.9-1.0 75 401-500 75 401-500
Over 1.0 Reject Over 500 Reject
65 501-600
54 601-700
42 701-800
29 801-900
15 901-1000
Reject Over 1000
January 31, 2013
1
REVISION OF SECTIONS 627 AND 708
PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
Sections 627 and 708 of the Standard Specifications are hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 627.04, delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:
627.04 Pavement Marking with Waterborne, Low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Solvent Base, and
High Build Acrylic Waterborne Paint (High Build). Striping shall be applied when the air and pavement
temperatures are no less than 45 °F for waterborne and high-build paint, and no less than 40 °F for low VOC
solvent base paint on asphalt or portland cement concrete pavements. The pavement surface shall be dry and
clean. Surface cleaning shall be required when there is deicing material on the road. Weather conditions shall be
conducive to satisfactory results.
In subsection 627.04 delete the table and replace it with the following
Description Paint
Waterborne Low VOC High Build
Alignment Lateral Deviation 2.0 inch per 200 foot Max
Coverage Rate Sq. Ft. per Gallon 90-100 90-100 67-73
Thickness Mil 16-18 16-18 22-24
Width Inches Per Plans +/- 0.25
Dry Time Minutes 5-10 5-10 5-10
Beads Application Rate, lbs/gal 7-8 9-10
Subsection 627.13 shall include the following:
Pay Item Pay Unit
Pavement Marking Paint (High Build) Gallon
Delete subsection 708.05 and replace with the following:
708.05 Pavement Marking Materials. Except for pavement marking paint, pavement marking materials shall be
selected from the Department’s Approved Products List (APL). Prior to start of work, a Certified Test Report (CTR)
for all pavement marking materials shall be submitted in accordance with subsection 106.13.
For white paint, the color after drying shall be a flat-white, free from tint, and shall provide the maximum amount of
opacity and visibility under both daylight and artificial light. For yellow paint, the Federal Standard 595B shall be
used to designate colors and the ASTM E308 shall be used to quantitatively define colors. After drying, the yellow
paint shall visually match Federal Standard 595B color chip number 33538, and shall be within 6 percent of
central color, PR-1 Chart, where x = 0.5007 and y = 0.4555 (The four pairs of chromaticity coordinates determine
the acceptable color in terms of the CIE 1931 Standard Colorimetric System measured with Standard Illuminant
D65.)
(a) Low VOC Solvent Base Paint. Low VOC Paint shall be ready mixed, and shall be capable of being applied to
Asphalt or Portland Cement Concrete Pavements.
(b) Acrylic Waterborne Paint. Acrylic waterborne paint shall be a lead-free, 100 percent Acrylic resin polymer
waterborne product. The finished product shall maintain its consistency during application at temperatures
compatible with conventional equipment.
January 31, 2013
2
REVISION OF SECTIONS 627 AND 708
PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
(c) High Build Acrylic Waterborne Paint. High build acrylic waterborne paint binder (nonvolatile portion of
vehicle) shall be 100 percent HD 21 acrylic cross linking polymer, by weight, as determined by infrared
analysis or other chemical analysis available to the Department.
Waterborne and High Build Acrylic Waterborne paint shall meet the following requirements:
Performance Requirements: The paint shall be water resistant and shall show no softening or blistering.
Table 708-1
WATERBORNE AND HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC WATERBORNE PAINT
Property White Yellow Test Method
Nonvolatile portion of vehicle (white and yellow), % 43.0 43.0 ASTM D 2205
Pigment Composition
Percent by weight♦ 60.0 60.0
ASTM D 4451
ASTM D 3723
Paint
Titanium Dioxide Content, lb/gal 1.0 0.2 ASTM D 5381
Properties of the Finished Paint
Total Non-volatiles, (solids) % by weight 77.0 77.0 FTMS 141C - Method 4053.1,
ASTM D 2369, or ASTM D 4758
Density, lbs/gal ■ 14.0-14.6 14.0-14.6 ASTM D 2205
Consistency (Viscosity) White and Y ellow, Krebs-
Stormer Units 85-95 85-95 ASTM D 562
Freeze Thaw Stability
Shall complete 5 or more
test cycles successfully ASTM D 2243
Fineness of Grind, Cleanliness Rating B, minimum 3 3 ASTM D 1210
Scrub Resistance 800 800 ASTM D2486
Directional Reflectance: [5 mil Wet Film] 90 50 ASTM E 1347
Dry Opacity (Contrast Ratio): [5 mil Wet Film] 0.95 0.95 ASTM D 2805
♦Percent by weight shall include percent of organic yellow pigment.
■Density shall not vary more than 0.3 lbs. /gal between batches.
February 17, 2012
REVISION OF SECTION 630
CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 630.16 delete the fifth paragraph.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 630
RETROREFLECTIVE SIGN SHEETING
(WITH TYPE VI SHEETING)
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 630.02, delete the sixth and seventh paragraphs, including Table 630-1, and replace them with the
following:
Retroreflective sheeting for all signs requiring an orange background shall be Type VI or Type Fluorescent.
Retroreflective sheeting for all signs requiring a yellow background shall Type Fluorescent.
Table 630-1
RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING TYPES
Sheeting
Type IV♦
Type VI
(Roll-up sign material)
Type Fluorescent
1
Application Work Zone Work Zone Work Zone
All Orange Construction Signs X
Orange Construction Signs that
are used only during daytime
hours for short term or mobile
operations
X X
4
Barricades (Temporary) X
Vertical Panels X
Flaggers Stop/Slow Paddle X X
Drums X
2
Non-orange Fixed Support signs
with prefix “W”
X
Special Warning Signs X
STOP sign (R1-1)
YIELD sign (R1-2)
WRONG WAY sign (R5-1a)
DO NOT ENTER sign (R5-1)
EXIT sign (E5-1a)
X
DETOUR sign (M4-9) or
(M4-10)
X
All other fixed support signs
3
X X
All other signs used only during
working hours
X X
All other signs that are used
only during daytime hours for
short term or mobile operations
X X
5
X
1 Fluorescent Sheeting shall be of a brand that is on the CDOT Approved Products List.
2 Drum Sheeting shall be manufactured for flexible devices.
3 Fixed support signs are defined as all signs that must remain in use outside of working hours. They shall be mounted in accordance with
Standard Plan S-630-1.
4 RS 24 only.
January 31, 2013
REVISION OF SECTION 630
SIGNS AND BARRICADES
Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
In subsection 630.02, delete the second paragraph, and replace with the following:
Temporary sign support assembly shall be timber, perforated square metal tubing inserted into a larger base post
or slip base or perforated metal U-channel with a slip base. The temporary sign support assembly shall conform
to NCHRP and AASHTO requirements regarding temporary sign supports during construction.
Subsection 630.02 shall include the following:
If a timber post is selected, it shall conform to the requirements of subsection 614.02.
November 1, 2012
1
REVISION OF SECTION 703
AGGREGATES FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT
Section 703 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 703.04 and replace with the following:
703.04 Aggregates for Hot Mix Asphalt. Aggregates for hot mix asphalt (HMA) shall be of uniform quality,
composed of clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag.
Excess of fine material shall be wasted before crushing. A percentage of the aggregate retained on the 4.75 mm
(No. 4) sieve for Gradings S, SX and SG— and on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve for Gradings SF and ST—shall
have at least two mechanically induced fractured faces when tested in accordance with Colorado Procedure 45.
This percentage will be specified in Table 403-1, as revised for the project in Section 403. The angularity of the
fine aggregate shall be a minimum of 45.0 percent when determined according to AASHTO T 304. Grading SF
mixes, when determined by RME, may not require fine aggregate angularity of 45.0 percent. Aggregate samples
representing each aggregate stockpile shall be non-plastic if the percent of aggregate passing the 2.36 mm (No.
8) sieve is greater than or equal to 10 percent by weight of the individual aggregate sample. Plasticity will be
determined in accordance with AASHTO T 90. The material shall not contain clay balls, vegetable matter, or
other deleterious substances.
The aggregate for Gradings ST, S, SX and SG shall have a percentage of wear of 45 or less when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 96.
Table 703-4
MASTER RANGE TABLE FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT
Sieve Size
Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves
Grading SF** Grading ST Grading SX Grading
S Grading SG
37.5 mm
(1½″)
100
25.0 mm (1″) 100 90 – 100
19.0 mm (¾″) 100 90 – 100
12.5 mm (½″) 100 90 – 100 * *
9.5 mm (⅜″) 100 90 – 100 * * *
4.75 mm (#4) 90 – 100 * * * *
2.36 mm (#8) * 28 – 58 28 – 58 23 – 49 19 – 45
1.18 mm (#16) 30 – 54
600 µm (#30) * * * * *
300 µm (#50)
150 µm (#100)
75 µm (#200) 2 – 12 2 – 10 2 – 10 2 – 8 1 – 7
* These additional Form 43 Specification Screens will initially be established using values from the As Used
Gradation shown on the Design Mix.
**SF applications are limited and the CDOT Pavement Design Manual should be referenced, prior to use.
Aggregates for stone matrix asphalt (SMA) shall be of uniform quality, composed of clean, hard, durable particles
of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag. A minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the 4.75
mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least two mechanically induced fractured faces when tested in accordance with
Colorado Procedure 45. The particles passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be the product of crushing rock
larger than 12.5 mm (½ inch) and shall be non-plastic when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 90.
November 1, 2012
2
REVISION OF SECTION 703
AGGREGATES FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT
Additionally, each source of aggregate for SMA shall meet the following requirements:
(1) No more than 30 percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96 Resistance to Degradation of Small-
Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
(2) No more than 12 percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 104 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of
Sodium Sulfate.
The aggregate for Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) shall meet the requirements of Table 703-4A when tested in
accordance with CP-L 4211 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval
Apparatus. The Contractor shall be assessed a price reduction of $1000 for each production sample of the
combined aggregate with a value greater than 20 according to CP-L 4211.
Table 703-4A
AGGREGATE DEGRADATION BY ABRASION
IN THE MICRO-DEVAL CP-L 4211
Not to exceed
Combined Aggregate (Mix Design) 18
Combined Aggregate (1/10,000 tons, or fraction thereof
during production) 20
July 28, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 703
CONCRETE AGGREGATES
Section 703 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete the second paragraph of subsection 703.00 and Table 703-1.
Delete subsections 703.01 and 703.02 and replace with the following:
703.01 Fine Aggregate for Concrete. Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 6, Class A. The minimum sand equivalent, as tested in accordance with Colorado Procedure 37 shall be 80
unless otherwise specified. The fineness modulus, as determined by AASHTO T 27, shall not be less than 2.50 or
greater than 3.50 unless otherwise approved.
703.02 Coarse Aggregate for Concrete. Coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 80, Class A aggregates, except that the percentage of wear shall not exceed 45 when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 96.
February 3, 2011
REVISION OF SECTION 712
WATER FOR MIXING OR CURING CONCRETE
Section 712 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:
Delete subsection 712.01 and replace it with the following:
712.01 Water. Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali,
sugar, vegetation, or other substance injurious to the finished product. Concrete mixing water shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C1602. The Contractor shall perform and submit tests to the Engineer at the frequencies
listed in ASTM C1602. Potable water may be used without testing. Where the source of water is relatively
shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass, and other foreign materials.
February 3, 2011
1
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
A. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive Order 11246)
1. The Bidder’s attention is called to the “Equal Opportunity Clause” and t he “Standard Federal Equal
Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications” set forth herein.
2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the
Contractor’s aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area are as
follows:
Goals and Timetable for Minority Utilization
Timetable - Until Further Notice
Economic
Area
Standard Metropolitan
Statistical Area (SMSA)
Counties
Involved
Goal
157
(Denver)
2080 Denver-Boulder Adams, Arapahoe, Boulder, Denver,
Douglas, Gilpin, Jefferson...................
13.8%
2670 Fort Collins Larimer................................................ 6.9%
3060 Greeley Weld.................................................... 13.1%
Non SMSA Counties Cheyenne, Clear Creek, Elbert,
Grand, Kit Carson, Logan, Morgan,
Park, Phillips, Sedgwick, Summit,
Washington & Yuma............................
12.8%
158
(Colo. Spgs. -
Pueblo)
1720 Colorado Springs El Paso, Teller..................................... 10.9%
6560 Pueblo Pueblo................................................. 27.5%
Non SMSA Counties Alamosa, Baca, Bent, Chaffee,
Conejos, Costilla, Crowley, Custer,
Fremont, Huerfano, Kiowa, Lake,
Las Animas, Lincoln, Mineral, Otero,
Prowers, Rio Grande, Saguache........
19.0%
159
(Grand Junction)
Non SMSA Archuleta, Delta, Dolores, Eagle,
Garfield, Gunnison, Hinsdale,
La Plata, Mesa, Moffat, Montezuma,
Montrose, Ouray, Pitkin, Rio Blanco,
Routt, San Juan, San Miguel
10.2%
156 (Cheyenne -
Casper WY)
Non SMSA Jackson County, Colorado.................. 7.5%
GOALS AND TIMETABLES FOR FEMALE UTILIZATION
Until Further Notice......................................................................................................................6.9% -- Statewide
February 3, 2011
2
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
These goals are applicable to all the Contractor’s construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally
assisted) performed in the covered area. If the Contractor performs construction work in a geographical
area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area
where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the Contractor also is subject to
the goals for both its federally involved and non-federally involved construction.
The Contractor’s compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based
on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause specific affirmative action obligations required by
the specifications set forth in 41 CF R 60-4.3(a), and its efforts meet the goals established for the
geographical area where the contract resulting form this solicitation is to be performed. The hours of
minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the
contract, and in each trade, and the Contractor shall make a good f aith effort to employ minorities and
women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from
Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor’s goals
shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and t he regulations in 41 CF R Par 60-4.
Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed
.
3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract
Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess
of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The
notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer
identification number; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting and
completion dates of the subcontract; and t he geographical area in which the contract is to be
performed.
4. As used in this specification, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the “covered area”
is the county or counties shown on the Invitation for Bids and on the plans. In cases where the
work is in two or more counties covered by differing percentage goals, the highest percentage will
govern.
February 3, 2011
3
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
B. STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications (Executive Order 11246)
1. As used in these Specifications:
a. “Covered area” means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this contract
resulted;
b. “Director” means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, United States Department of
Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority;
c. “Employer identification number” means the Federal Social Security number used on the Employer’s
Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941.
d. “Minority” includes;
(i) Black (all persons having origins in any of the Black African racial groups not of Hispanic
origin);
(ii) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American or other
Spanish Culture or origin, regardless of race);
(iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far
East, Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands); and
(iv) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of
North America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and
participation or community identification).
2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work involving any
construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of
these specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female
participation and which is set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted.
3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by the U.S.
Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an ass ociation, its affirmative
action obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with
that Plan for those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be abl e to
demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each
Contractor or Subcontractor participating in an approved Plan is individually required to comply with its
obligations under the EEO clause, and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in
each trade in which it has employees. The overall good f aith performance by other Contractors or
Subcontractor toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered Contractor’s or
Subcontractor’s failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals and timetables.
4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 7a through p
of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted are
expressed as percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization
the Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees
in the covered area. Co vered Construction contractors performing construction work in geographical
areas where they do not have a Federal or federally assisted construction contract shall apply the
minority and female goals established for the geographical area where the work is being performed.
Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and such notices may be obtained
from any office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs Office or from Federal procurement contracting
officers. The Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in meeting its goals in each
craft during the period specified.
February 3, 2011
4
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union with whom the
Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the
Contractor’s obligations under these specifications, Executive Order 11246, or the regulations
promulgated pursuant thereto.
6. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and t rainees to be counted in meeting the goals,
such apprentices and t rainees must be employed by the Contractor during the training period, and t he
Contractor must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of
their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained pursuant
to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor.
7. The Contractor shall t ake specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. T he
evaluation of the Contractor’s compliance with these specifications shall be bas ed upon its effort to
achieve maximum results from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall
implement affirmative action steps at least as extensive as the following;
a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation , and coercion at all sites,
and in all facilities at which the Contractor’s employees are assigned to work. The Contractor, where
possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The Contractor shall
specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and ot her on-site supervisory personnel are
aware of and ca rry out the Contractor’s obligation to maintain such a working environment, with
specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or in such facilities.
b. Establish and m aintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide written
notification to minority and female recruitment sources and t o community organizations when the
Contractor or its union have employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the
organization’s responses.
c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each minority and female off-
the-street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a recruitment source of community
organization and of what action was taken with respect to each individual. If such individual was sent
to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor by the union or, if
referred, not employed by the Contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefor,
along with whatever additional actions the Contractor may have taken.
d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union with which the Contractor has a
collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or woman sent
by the Contractor, or when he Contractor has other information that the union referral process has
impeded the Contractor’s efforts to meet its obligations.
e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the area which
expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and
trainee programs relevant to the Contractor’s employment needs, especially those programs funded
or approved by the Department of Labor. The Contractor shall provide notice of these programs to
the sources compiled under 7b above.
f. Disseminate the Contractor’s EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs
and requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by
including it in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company
newspaper, annual report, etc., by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and
with all minority and female employees at least once a year, and by posting the Contractor’s EEO
policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where construction work is
performed.
February 3, 2011
5
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
g. Review, at least annually, the Contractor’s EEO policy and affirmative action obligations under these
specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination
or other employment decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory
personnel such as Superintendents, General Foreman, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work
at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these
meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter.
h. Disseminate the Contractor’s EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media,
specifically including minority and female news media, and pr oviding written notification to and
discussing the Contractors and Subcontractors with whom the Contractor does or anticipates doing
business.
i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and community organizations, to
schools with minority and female students and to minority and female recruitment and t raining
organizations serving the Contractor’s recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one
month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any
recruitment source, the Contractor shall send written notification to organizations such as the above,
describing the openings, screening procedures, and tests to be used in the selection process.
j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and,
where reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation employment to minority and female
youth both on the site and in other areas of a Contractor’s workforce.
k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obl igation to do so under 41 CFR
Part 60-3.
l. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all minority and female personnel for
promotional opportunities and enco urage these employees to seek or to prepare for, through
appropriate training, etc. such opportunities.
m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and other personnel practices, do
not have a d iscriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and em ployment related
activities to ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor’s obligations under these specifications
are being carried out.
n. Ensure that all facilities and Contractor’s activities are nonsegregated except that separate or single-user
toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between the sexes.
o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female
construction contractors and s uppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female
contractor associations and other business associations.
p. Conduct a r eview, at least annually, of all supervisor’s adherence to and performance under the
Contractor’s EEO policies and affirmative action obligation.
February 3, 2011
6
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in fulfilling one or more of
their affirmative action obligations (7a through p). The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor-
union contractor-community, or other similar group of which the Contractor is a member and participant,
may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 7a through p of these specifications
provided that the Contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group
has a positive impact on t he employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that the
concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor’s minority and female workforce
participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goal and timetables, and can provide access
to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the Contractor. The
obligation to comply, however, is the Contractor’s and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall
not be a defense for the Contractor’s noncompliance.
9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The Contractor,
however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all
minority groups, both male and female, and al l women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently,
the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a par ticular group is employed in a
substantially disparate manner (for example, even thought the Contractor has achieved its goals for
women generally, the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of
women is underutilized).
10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards to discriminate against
any person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
11. The Contractor shall not enter into any Subcontract with any person or firm debarred from Government
contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246.
12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and of the
Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as
may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and i ts implementing
regulations, by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry
out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246,
as amended.
13 The Contractor in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement specific affirmative action
steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these specifications, so as to
achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contractor fails
to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these
specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8.
14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that
the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may
be required by the Government and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee
the name, address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union a ffiliation if any, employee
identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic,
apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the
indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained
in an easily understandable and retrievable form, however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this
requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate records.
15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish
different standards of compliance or upon application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area
residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development
Block Grant Program).
February 3, 2011
7
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
C. SPECIFIC EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY RESPONSIBILITIES.
1. General.
a. Equal employment opportunity requirements not to discriminate and to take affirmative action to assure
equal employment opportunity as required by Executive Order 11246 and Executive Order 11375 are
set forth in Required Contract. Provisions (Form FHWA 1273 or 1316, as appropriate) and these
Special Provisions which are imposed pursuant to Section 140 of Title 23, U.S.C., as established by
Section 22 of the Federal-Aid highway Act of 1968. The requirements set forth in these Special
Provisions shall constitute the specific affirmative action requirements for project activities under this
contract and supplement the equal employment opportunity requirements set forth in the Required
Contract provisions.
b. The Contractor will work with the State highway agencies and t he Federal Government in carrying out
equal employment opportunity obligations and in their review of his/her activities under the contract.
c. The Contractor and all his/her subcontractors holding subcontracts not including material suppliers, of
$10,000 or more, will comply with the following minimum specific requirement activities of equal
employment opportunity: (The equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246,
as set forth in Volume 6, Chapter 4, Section 1, Subsection 1 of the Federal-Aid Highway Program
Manual, are applicable to material suppliers as well as contractors and su bcontractors.) T he
Contractor will include these requirements in every subcontract of $10,000 or more with such
modification of language as is necessary to make them binding on the subcontractor.
2. Equal Employment Opportunity Policy. The Contractor will accept as his operating policy the following
statement which is designed to further the provision of equal employment opportunity to all persons
without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, and to promote the full realization of
equal employment opportunity through a positive continuing program;
It is the policy of this Company to assure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during
employment, without regard to their race, religion, sex, color, or national origin. Such action shall include;
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and s election for training, including
apprenticeship, preapprenticeship, and/or on-the-job training.
3. Equal Employment Opportunity Officer. The Contractor will designate and make known to the State highway
agency contracting officers and equal employment opportunity officer (herein after referred to as the EEO
Officer) who will have the responsibility for an must be capable of effectively administering and promoting
an active contractor program of equal employment opportunity and who must be a ssigned adequate
authority and responsibility to do so.
4. Dissemination of Policy.
a. All members of the Contractor’s staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and di scharge
employees, or who recommend such action, or who are substantially involved in such action, will be
made fully cognizant of, and will implement, the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy
and contractual responsibilities to provide equal employment opportunity in each grade and
classification of employment. To ensure that the above agreement will be met, the following actions
will be taken as a minimum;
(1) Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office employees will be conducted before the start of
work and then not less often than once every six months, at which time the Contractor’s equal
employment opportunity policy and its implementation will be r eviewed and ex plained. The
meetings will be conducted by the EEO Officer or other knowledgeable company official.
February 3, 2011
8
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
(2) All new supervisory or personnel office employees will be given a thorough indoctrination by the EEO
Officer or other knowledgeable company official, covering all major aspects of the Contractor’s
equal employment opportunity obligations within thirty days following their reporting for duty with
the Contractor.
(3) All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for the project will be instructed by the EEO
Officer or appropriate company official in the Contractor’s procedures for locating and hi ring
minority group employees.
b. In order to make the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy known to all employees,
prospective employees and p otential sources of employees, i.e., schools, employment agencies,
labor unions (where appropriate), college placement officers, etc., the Contractor will take the
following actions:
(1) Notices and po sters setting forth the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy will be
placed in areas readily accessible to employees, applicants for employment and potential
employees.
.
(2) The Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy and the procedures to implement such
policy will be br ought to the attention of employees by means of meetings, employee
handbooks, or other appropriate means.
5. Recruitment.
a. When advertising for employees, the Contractor will include in all advertisements for employees the
notation; “An Equal Opportunity Employer.” A ll such advertisements will be pub lished in
newspapers or other publications having a l arge circulation among minority groups in the area
from which the project work force would normally be derived.
b. The Contractor will, unless precluded by a valid bargaining agreement, conduct systematic and direct
recruitment through public and private employee referral sources likely to yield qualified minority
group applicants, including, but not limited to, State employment agencies, schools, colleges and
minority group organizations. To meet this requirement, the Contractor will, through his EEO
Officer, identify sources of potential minority group employees, and establish with such identified
sources procedures whereby minority group applicants may be referred to the Contractor for
employment consideration.
In the event the Contractor has a valid bargaining agreement providing for exclusive hiring hall
referrals, he is expected to observe the provisions of that agreement to the extent that the system
permits the Contractor’s compliance with equal employment opportunity contract provisions. (The
U.S. Department of Labor has held that where implementation of such agreements have the
effect of discriminating against minorities or women, or obligates the Contractor to do the same,
such implementation violates Executive Order 11246, as amended.)
c. The Contractor will encourage his present employees to refer minority group applicants for
employment by posting appropriate notices or bulletins in areas accessible to all such employees.
In addition, information and procedures with regard to referring minority group applicants will be
discussed with employees.
`6. Personnel Actions. Wages, working conditions, and em ployee benefits shall be es tablished and
administered, and personnel actions of every type, including hiring, upgrading, promotion, transfer,
demotion, layoff, and termination, shall be taken without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or
national origin. The following procedures shall be followed;
a. The Contractor will conduct periodic inspections of project sites to insure that working conditions
and employee facilities do not indicate discriminatory treatment of project site personnel.
February 3, 2011
9
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
b. The Contractor will periodically evaluate the spread of wages paid within each classification to
determine any evidence of discriminatory wage practices.
c. The Contractor will periodically review selected personnel actions in depth to determine whether there
is evidence of discrimination. Where evidence is found, the Contractor will promptly take
corrective action. If the review indicates that the discrimination may extend beyond the actions
reviewed, such corrective action shall include all affected persons.
d. The Contract will promptly investigate all complaints of alleged discrimination made to the Contractor
in connection with his obligations under this contract, will attempt to resolve such complaints, and
will take appropriate corrective action within a reasonable time. If the investigation indicates that
the discrimination may affect persons other than the complainant, such corrective action shall
include such other persons. Upon completion of each investigation, the Contractor will inform
every complainant of all of his avenues of appeal.
7. Training and Promotion.
a. The Contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and increasing the skills of minority group and
women employees, and applicants for employment.
b. Consistent with the Contractor’s work force requirements and as permissible under Federal and State
regulations, the Contractor shall make full use of training programs, i.e., apprenticeship, and on-
the-job training programs for the geographical area of contract performance. Where feasible, 25
percent of apprentices or trainees in each occupation shall be in their first year of apprenticeship
or training.
c. The Contractor will advise employees and applicants for employment of available training programs
and entrance requirements for each.
d. The Contractor will periodically review the training and pr omotion potential of minority group and
women employees and w ill encourage eligible employees to apply for such training and
promotion.
8. Unions. If the Contractor relies in whole or in part upon unions as a source of employees, the Contractor
will use his/her best efforts to obtain the cooperation of such unions to increase opportunities for
minority groups and women with the unions, and t o effect referrals by such unions of minority and
female employees. Actions by the Contractor either directly or thorough a contractor’s association
acting as agent will include the procedures set forth below:
a. The Contractor will use best efforts to develop, in cooperation with the unions, joint training programs
aimed toward qualifying more minority group members and women for membership in the unions
and increasing the skills of minority group employees and women so that they may qualify for
higher paying employment.
b. The Contractor will use best efforts to incorporate an equal employment opportunity clause into each
union agreement to the end that such union will be contractually bound to refer applicants without
regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
c. The Contractor is to obtain information as to the referral practices and policies of the labor union
except that to the extent such information is within the exclusive possession of the labor union
and such labor union refuses to furnish such information to the Contractor, the Contractor shall so
certify to the State highway department and shall set forth what efforts have been made to obtain
such information.
February 3, 2011
10
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
d. In the event the union is unable to provide the Contractor with a reasonable flow of minority and women
referrals within he time limit set forth in the collective bargaining agreement, the Contractor will,
through independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies without regard to race, color,
religion , sex or national origin; making full efforts to obtain qualified and/or qualifiable minority group
persons and women. (The U.S. Department of Labor has held that it shall be no ex cuse that the
union with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral
failed to refer minority employees.) In the event the union referral practice prevents the Contractor
from meeting the obligations pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and these special
provisions, such Contractor shall immediately notify the State highway agency.
9. Subcontracting.
a. The Contractor will use his best efforts to solicit bids from and to utilize minority group subcontractors or
subcontractors with meaningful minority group and female representation among their employees.
Contractors shall obtain lists of minority-owned construction firms from State highway agency
personnel.
b. The Contractor will use his best efforts to ensure subcontractor compliance with their equal employment
opportunity obligations.
10. Records and Reports.
a. The Contractor will keep such records as are necessary to determine compliance with the Contractor’s
equal employment opportunity obligations. The records kept by the Contractor will be designed to
indicate:
(1) The number of minority and nonm inority group members and w omen employed in each work
classification on the project.
(2) The Progress and ef forts being made in cooperation with unions to increase employment
opportunities for minorities and women (applicable only to contractors who rely in whole or in part
on unions as a source of their work force).
(3) The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring, training, qualifying, and upgrading minority
and female employees, and
(4) The progress and efforts being made in securing the services of minority group subcontractors or
subcontractors with meaningful minority and female representation among their employees.
b. All such records must be retained for a period of three years following completion of the contract work
and shall be available at reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized representatives of
the State highway agency and the Federal Highway Administration.
c. The Contractors will submit an annual report to the State highway agency each July for the duration of the
project, indicating the number of minority, women, and no n-minority group employees currently
engaged in each work classification required by the contract work. This information is to be reported
on Form PR 1391.
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION BID PLANS OF PROPOSED
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
CBC REPLACEMENT
ARTHUR DITCH AT MOUNTAIN AVE & MYRTLE ST
FORT
COLLINS
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
MOUNTAIN AVENUE
STA. 59+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, BEGIN PROJECT
STA. 62+40.29
BEGIN ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
74.60
STA. 63+14.89
END ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
STA. 66+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, END PROJECT
TOTAL 74.60 0
SUMMARY OF PROJECT LENGTH FEET MILES
ROADWAY 74.60 0.014
MAJOR STRUCTURE 0 0.000
PROJECT GROSS LENGTH 74.60 0.014
TABULATION OF LENGTH & DESIGN DATA
STATION
FEET
MAJOR
STR.
ROADWAY
SHEET NO. OF TITLE
1 of 64 COVER SHEET
2 of 64 COMBINED SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
3 of 64 COMBINED SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
MOUNTAIN AVENUE
SHEET NO. OF TITLE
4 of 64 TITLE SHEET
5 of 64 STANDARD PLANS LIST
6 of 64 GENERAL NOTES
7 of 64 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
8 of 64 TYPICAL SECTIONS
9 of 64 TABULATION OF REMOVALS
10 of 64 TABULATION OF ROADWAY & UTILITIES
11 of 64 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
12 of 64 ROADWAY PLAN
13 of 64 PROFILE PLAN
14 of 64 GRADING PLAN
15 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
16 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
17 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
18 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
19 of 64 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
20 of 64 STRUCTURE GENERAL INFORMATION
21 of 64 STRUCTURE LAYOUT
22 of 64 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS
CONTRACT CONTRACT ITEM UNIT
BOOK PAGE SHEET ITEM NO. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST.
201 CLEARING & GRUBBING LS 0.5 0.5 1
202 REMOVAL OF TREE EA 1 1
202 REMOVAL OF INLET EA 2 3 5
202 REMOVAL OF MANHOLE EA 1 1
202 REMOVAL OF PIPE LF 139 139
202 REMOVAL OF SIDEWALK SY 51 131 182
202 REMOVAL OF FIRE HYDRANT EA 1 1
202 REMOVAL OF FENCE LF 285 285
202 REMOVAL OF CURB LF 129 129
202 REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER LF 117 727 844
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE PAVEMENT SY 405 405
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE DRIVEWAY SY 50 114 164
202 REMOVAL OF ASPHALT MAT SY 2,295 2,295
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE BOX CULVERT EA 1 1 2
203 EXCAVATION CY 19 234 253
203 MUCK EXCAVATION CY 145 99 107 351
203 POTHOLING LS 0.5 0.5 1
206 SHORING (AREA 1) LS 1 1
206 SHORING (AREA 2) LS 1 1
206 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION CY 1,221 897 2,118
206 FILTER MATERIAL (CLASS A) CY 183 134 317
206 FILTER MATERIAL (CLASS B) CY 63 46 109
206 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (CLASS 1) CY 319 239 558
206 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (FLOWFILL) CY 20 20 40
208 STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION (BLOCK & GRAVEL) EA 2 5 7
208 VEHICLE TRACKING PAD EA 1 1 2
208 CONCRETE WASHOUT STRUCTURE EA 1 1 2
208 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF SEDIMENT LS 0.5 0.5 1
208 EROSION CONTROL SUPERVISOR LS 0.5 0.5 1
210 ADJUST MANHOLE EA 2 2
210 ADJUST WATER METER EA 1 1
210 RELOCATE WATER METER EA 1 1
210 ADJUST WSB EA 1 1
210 RELOCATE WSB EA 1 1
212 TREE RETENTION & PROTECTION LS 0.5 0.5 1
MOUNTAIN AVE MYRTLE ST
INDEX ROADWAY, TRAFFIC
DRAINAGE & UTILITIES STRUCTURESWMP
ROADWAY, TRAFFIC
DRAINAGE & UTILITIES STRUCTURE SWMP
PROJECT TOTALS
CONTRACT CONTRACT ITEM UNIT
BOOK PAGE SHEET ITEM NO. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST.
304 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (CLASS 6) TON 115 735 850
403 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING S) (75) (PG 58-28) TON 185 185
403 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING SG) (75) (PG 58-28) TON 371 371
412 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (8 INCH) SY 335 335
412 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY (6 INCH) SY 49 166 215
420 GEOSYNTHETIC PAVEMENT INTERLAYER SY 63 63
515 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SY 307 224 531
601 CONCRETE CLASS D CY 240 174 414
602 REINFORCING STEEL (EPOXY COATED) LB 87,656 65,291 152,947
603 10 INCH SDR 35 PVC PIPE LF 2 2
603 18 INCH SDR 35 PIPE LF 136 136
604 MANHOLE (48 INCH DIA) EA 1 1
604 MANHOLE (72 INCH DIA) EA 1 1
604 MANHOLE RING AND COVER EA 2 2 4
604 INLET TYPE 13 (SINGLE) EA 2 3 5
607 FENCE (SPECIAL) LF 116 116
608 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (6 INCH) SY 51 278 329
608 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (4 INCH REINFORCED) SY 21 21
608 CONCRETE CURB RAMP SY 55 55
608 DETECTABLE WARNING SF 25 25
609 BARRIER CURB LF 125 43 168
609 CURB AND GUTTER LF 113 756 869
609 GUTTER TYPE 2 (3 FOOT) LF 21 21
619 8 INCH PVC PIPE (C900) LF 426 426
619 16 INCH STEEL CASING LF 40 40
619 24 INCH STEEL CASING LF 52 52
619 CONNECT TO EXISTING 6 INCH PVC LS 1 1
619 CONNECT TO EXISTING 8 INCH PVC LS 1 1
619 WATER SERVICES EA 8 8
619 COPPER PIPE LF 75 75
619 PLUG EXISTING 4 INCH PIPE LS 1 1
619 FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY EA 1 1
619 ABANDON VALVE EA 1 1
619 8 INCH WATERLINE LOWERING EA 2 2
626 MOBILIZATION LS 0.5 0.5 1
630 TRAFFIC CONTROL LS 0.5 0.5 1
630 VARIABLE MESSAGE BOARDS DAY 10 10 20
630 FLAGGING (SPECIAL) HOUR 120 120 240
MOUNTAIN AVE MYRTLE ST
INDEX ROADWAY, TRAFFIC
DRAINAGE & UTILITIES STRUCTURESWMP
ROADWAY, TRAFFIC
DRAINAGE & UTILITIES STRUCTURE SWMP
PROJECT TOTALS
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION BID PLANS OF PROPOSED
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
CBC REPLACEMENT
ARTHUR DITCH AT MOUNTAIN AVENUE
FORT
COLLINS
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
MOUNTAIN AVENUE
STA. 59+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, BEGIN PROJECT
STA. 62+40.29
BEGIN ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
74.60
STA. 63+14.89
END ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
STA. 66+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, END PROJECT
TOTAL 74.60 0
SUMMARY OF PROJECT LENGTH FEET MILES
ROADWAY 74.60 0.014
MAJOR STRUCTURE 0 0.000
PROJECT GROSS LENGTH 74.60 0.014
DESIGN DATA MOUNTAIN
MINIMUM RADIUS OF CURVE 1075 FT
MAXIMUM GRADE 5.00%
MINIMUM S.S.D. HORIZONTAL 400 FT
MINIMUM S.S.D. VERTICAL 400 FT
MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED 30 MPH
2032 DESIGN TRAFFIC N/A
CLEAR ZONE DISTANCE (TANGENT) 2 FT
TABULATION OF LENGTH & DESIGN DATA
STATION
FEET
MAJOR
STR.
ROADWAY
SHEET NO. OF TITLE
4 of 64 TITLE SHEET
5 of 64 STANDARD PLANS LIST
6 of 64 GENERAL NOTES
7 of 64 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
8 of 64 TYPICAL SECTIONS
9 of 64 TABULATION OF REMOVALS
10 of 64 TABULATION OF ROADWAY & UTILITIES
11 of 64 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
12 of 64 ROADWAY PLAN
13 of 64 PROFILE PLAN
14 of 64 GRADING PLAN
15 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
16 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
17 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
18 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
19 of 64 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
ITEM NO. 202 202 202 202 202 202
REMOVAL REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF
REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF OF CURB CONCRETE CONCRETE
INLET SIDEWALK OF CURB AND GUTTER PAVEMENT DRIVEWAY
EA SY LF LF SY SY
62+19 TO 63+15 LT 73
62+19 TO 62+86 RT 44
62+18 TO 63+15 LT & RT 129
62+40 TO 62+83 LT 28
62+48 TO 62+82 RT 23
62+18 TO 63+15 LT & RT 405
62+52 TO 62+73 LT 27
62+48 TO 62+63 RT 23
62+23 LT 1
62+23 RT 1
PROJECT TOTALS 2 51 129 117 405 50
LOCATION
REMARKS
ITEM NO. 201 203 203 212 304 412 412 608 609 609 626
TREE AGGREGATE CONCRETE CONCRETE CONCRETE
CLEARING & RETENTION & BASE COURSE PAVEMENT DRIVEWAY SIDEWALK BARRIER CURB AND
GRUBBING EXCAVATION POTHOLING PROTECTION (CLASS 6) (8 INCH) (6 INCH) (6 INCH) CURB GUTTER MOBILIZATION
LS CY LS LS TON SY SY SY LF LF LS
62+81 TO 63+15 LT 19
62+19 TO 63+15 LT 206
62+18 TO 62+86 RT 129
62+19 TO 63+15 LT 71
62+18 TO 62+86 RT 44
62+19 TO 63+15 LT 71
62+18 TO 62+86 RT 42
62+53 TO 62+72 LT 26
62+48 TO 62+66 RT 23
62+40 TO 62+83 LT 28
62+48 TO 62+82 RT 23
62+53 TO 62+72 LT
62+60 TO 62+66 RT
62+46 TO 63+15 LT 69
62+18 TO 62+91 RT 56
62+41 TO 63+15 LT & RT 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
PROJECT TOTALS 0.5 19 0.5 0.5 115 335 49 51 125 113 0.5
LOCATION
ITEM NO. 604 604 619
72 INCH INLET 24 INCH
DIA TYPE 13 STEEL
MANHOLE (SINGLE) CASING UTILITY
EA EA LF COMPANY
62+46 TO 62+86 RT 52
62+23 RT 1 1
62+23 LT 1
PROJECT TOTALS 1 2 52
LOCATION
REMARKS
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNITS QUANTITY
202 Removal of Concrete Box Culvert EA 1
203 Muck Excavation CY 145
206 Shoring (Area 1) LS 1
206 Structure Excavation CY 1,221
206 Filter Material (Class A) CY 183
206 Filter Material (Class B) CY 63
206 Structure Backfill (Class I) CY 319
515 Waterproofing Membrane SY 307
601 Concrete Class D (Box Culvert) CY 240
602 Reinforcing Steel (Epoxy Coated) LB 87,656
604 Manhole Ring and Cover EA 2
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION BID PLANS OF PROPOSED
CITY OF FORT COLLINS
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
CBC REPLACEMENT
ARTHUR DITCH AT MYRTLE STREET
FORT
COLLINS
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
SHEET NO. OF TITLE
29 of 64 TITLE SHEET
30 of 64 STANDARD PLANS LIST
31 of 64 GENERAL NOTES
32 of 64 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
33 of 64 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
34 of 64 TYPICAL SECTIONS
35 of 64 TABULATION OF REMOVALS
36 of 64 TABULATION OF ROADWAY
37 of 64 TABULATION OF UTILITIES
38 of 64 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
39 of 64 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
40 of 64 ROADWAY PLAN
41 of 64 ROADWAY PLAN
42 of 64 ROADWAY PROFILE
43 of 64 ROADWAY PROFILE
44 of 64 GUTTER PROFILES
45 of 64 GUTTER PROFILES
46 of 64 GRADING PLAN
47 of 64 GRADING PLAN
48 of 64 STORM INLET RECONSTRUCTION DETAILS
49 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
50 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
51 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
52 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
53 of 64 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
54 of 64 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
55 of 64 STRUCTURE GENERAL INFORMATION
56 of 64 STRUCTURE LAYOUT
57 of 64 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS
58 of 64 STRUCTURAL TRANSITION DETAILS
59 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN TABULATION AND NOTES
60 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
61 of 64 POTHOLE DATA
62 of 64 WATER UTILITIES: DRAWING INDEX, NOTES, AND ABBREV.
63 of 64 WATER UTILITIES: WATER MAIN REHABILITATION
64 of 64 WATER UTILITIES: WATER DETAILS
MYRTLE STREET
STA. 19+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, BEGIN PROJECT
STA. 20+00.00
BEGIN ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
300.00
STA. 23+00.00
END ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
STA. 23+00.00
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
CONTRACT CONTRACT ITEM UNIT
BOOK PAGE SHEET ITEM NO. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST.
201 CLEARING & GRUBBING LS 0.5 0.5
202 REMOVAL OF TREE EA 1 1
202 REMOVAL OF INLET EA 3 3
202 REMOVAL OF MANHOLE EA 1 1
202 REMOVAL OF PIPE LF 139 139
202 REMOVAL OF SIDEWALK SY 131 131
202 REMOVAL OF FIRE HYDRANT EA 1 1
202 REMOVAL OF FENCE LF 285 285
202 REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER LF 727 727
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE DRIVEWAY SY 114 114
202 REMOVAL OF ASPHALT MAT SY 2,295 2,295
202 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE BOX CULVERT EA 1 1
203 EXCAVATION CY 234 234
203 MUCK EXCAVATION CY 99 107 206
203 POTHOLING LS 0.5 0.5
206 SHORING (AREA 2) LS 1 1
206 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION CY 897 897
206 FILTER MATERIAL (CLASS A) CY 134 134
206 FILTER MATERIAL (CLASS B) CY 46 46
206 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (CLASS 1) CY 239 239
206 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (FLOWFILL) CY 20 20
208 STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION (BLOCK & GRAVEL) EA 5 5
208 VEHICLE TRACKING PAD EA 1 1
208 CONCRETE WASHOUT STRUCTURE EA 1 1
208 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF SEDIMENT LS 0.5 0.5
208 EROSION CONTROL SUPERVISOR LS 0.5 0.5
210 ADJUST MANHOLE EA 2 2
210 ADJUST WATER METER EA 1 1
210 RELOCATE WATER METER EA 1 1
210 ADJUST WSB EA 1 1
210 RELOCATE WSB EA 1 1
212 TREE RETENTION & PROTECTION LS 0.5 0.5
304 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (CLASS 6) TON 735 735
403 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING S) (75) (PG 58-28) TON 185 185
403 HOT MIX ASPHALT (GRADING SG) (75) (PG 58-28) TON 371 371
INDEX ROADWAY, TRAFFIC PROJECT TOTALS
DRAINAGE & UTILITIES STRUCTURESWMP
CONTRACT CONTRACT ITEM UNIT
BOOK PAGE SHEET ITEM NO. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST. PLAN AS CONST.
412 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY (6 INCH) SY 166 166
420 GEOSYNTHETIC PAVEMENT INTERLAYER SY 63 63
515 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SY 224 224
601 CONCRETE CLASS D CY 174 174
602 REINFORCING STEEL (EPOXY COATED) LB 65,291 65,291
603 10 INCH SDR 35 PVC PIPE LF 2 2
603 18 INCH SDR 35 PIPE LF 136 136
604 MANHOLE (48 INCH DIA) EA 1 1
604 MANHOLE RING AND COVER EA 2 2
604 INLET TYPE 13 (SINGLE) EA 3 3
607 FENCE (SPECIAL) LF 116 116
608 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (6 INCH) SY 278 278
608 CONCRETE SIDEWALK (4 INCH REINFORCED) SY 21 21
608 CONCRETE CURB RAMP SY 55 55
608 DETECTABLE WARNING SF 25 25
609 BARRIER CURB LF 43 43
609 CURB AND GUTTER LF 756 756
609 GUTTER TYPE 2 (3 FOOT) LF 21 21
619 8 INCH PVC PIPE (C900) LF 426 426
619 16 INCH STEEL CASING LF 40 40
619 CONNECT TO EXISTING 6 INCH PVC LS 1 1
619 CONNECT TO EXISTING 8 INCH PVC LS 1 1
619 WATER SERVICES EA 8 8
619 COPPER PIPE LF 75 75
619 PLUG EXISTING 4 INCH PIPE LS 1 1
619 FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY EA 1 1
619 ABANDON VALVE EA 1 1
619 8 INCH WATERLINE LOWERING EA 2 2
626 MOBILIZATION LS 0.5 0.5
630 TRAFFIC CONTROL LS 0.5 0.5
630 VARIABLE MESSAGE BOARDS DAY 10 10
630 FLAGGING (SPECIAL) HOUR 120 120
INDEX ROADWAY, TRAFFIC PROJECT TOTALS
DRAINAGE & UTILITIES STRUCTURESWMP
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
ITEM NO. 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 202 202
REMOVAL REMOVAL OF REMOVAL
REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF REMOVAL OF OF CURB CONCRETE OF ASPHALT
TREE INLET MANHOLE PIPE SIDEWALK FIRE HYDRANT FENCE AND GUTTER DRIVEWAY MAT
EA EA EA LF SY EA LF LF SY SY
20+00 TO 23+00 LT & RT 1,710
23+00 TO 24+75 LT & RT 524
22+41 TO 22+80 RT 61
21+85 TO 22+68 LT 53
21+13 TO 22+85 RT 61
20+30 TO 22+97 LT 286
20+30 TO 24+70 RT 441
21+85 TO 22+68 LT
21+13 TO 22+85 RT
20+30 TO 23+18 LT 80
20+40 TO 21+70 RT 51
21+14 TO 21+46 LT 139
20+49 TO 24+52 285
20+30 RT 1
20+32 LT 1
24+43 RT 1
21+46 LT 1
21+34 RT 1
20+32 RT 1
PROJECT TOTALS 1 3 1 139 131 1 285 727 114 2,295
LOCATION
REMARKS
ITEM NO. 201 203 203 203 212 304 403 403 412 420 607 608 608 608 608 609 609 609 626
TREE AGGREGATE HOT MIX HOT MIX CONCRETE GEOSYNTHETIC CONCRETE CONCRETE CONCRETE GUTTER
CLEARING & MUCK RETENTION & BASE COURSE ASPHALT ASPHALT DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT FENCE SIDEWALK SIDEWALK CURB DETECTABLE BARRIER CURB AND TYPE 2
GRUBBING EXCAVATION EXCAVATION POTHOLING PROTECTION (CLASS 6) (GRADING S) (GRADING SG) (6 INCH) INTERLAYER (SPECIAL) (6 INCH) (4 INCH REINFORCED) RAMP WARNING CURB GUTTER (3 FOOT) MOBILIZATION
LS CY CY LS LS TON TON TON SY SY LF SY SY SY SF LF LF LF LS
20+00 TO 23+00 LT & RT 234
20+13 TO 20+55 LT 99
20+00 TO 23+00 LT & RT 645 165 330 63
23+00 TO 24+75 RT 32 5 9
22+44 TO 22+80 RT 16 4 9
23+00 TO 24+52 LT 42 11 23
20+30 TO 23+00 LT 284
20+30 TO 24+70 RT 472
21+17 TO 22+36 LT 116
21+15 TO 23+86 RT 50
22+49 TO 22+57 RT 21
20+42 TO 23+39 LT 81
20+42 TO 24+59 RT 197
22+00 TO 22+20 RT 21
20+33 TO 20+47 LT 9
20+33 TO 24+67 RT 46
21+18 TO 22+69 LT
23+62 TO 23+80 RT
22+57 TO 22+61 RT 43
22+42 TO 22+83 RT 25
20+13 TO 20+55 LT
23+52 TO 24+52 RT 116
20+00 TO 24+75 LT & RT 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
PROJECT TOTALS 0.5 234 99 0.5 0.5 735 185 371 166 63 116 278 21 55 25 43 756 21 0.5
LOCATION
ITEM NO. 210 210 210 210 210 603 603 604 604 619 619 619 619 619 619 619 619 619 619
ADJUST RELOCATE 48 INCH INLET 8 INCH CONNECT TO CONNECT TO PLUG FIRE 8 INCH
ADJUST WATER WATER ADJUST RELOCATE 10 INCH 18 INCH DIA TYPE 13 PVC PIPE 16 INCH EXISTING EXISTING WATER COPPER EXISTING HYDRANT ABANDON WATERLINE
MANHOLE METER METER WSB WSB PLASTIC PIPEPLASTIC PIPE MANHOLE (SINGLE) (C900) STEEL CASING 6 INCH PVC 8 INCH PVC SERVICE PIPE 4 INCH PIPE ASSEMBLY VALVE LOWERING UTILITY
EA EA EA EA EA LF LF EA EA LF LF LS LS EA LF LS EA EA EA COMPANY
20+33 LT 2 1
21+16 TO 21+55 LT 40
21+17 TO 21+46 LT 136
21+74 LT 1
21+53 LT 1
21+15 LT 1
21+80 LT 1
21+81 LT 1
22+59 LT 1
23+28 RT 1
24+46 RT 1
20+50 LT 1
20+28 RT 1
20+00 TO 24+75 LT 426 1 1 8 75 1 1 2
PROJECT TOTALS 2 1 1 1 1 2 136 1 3 426 40 1 1 8 75 1 1 1 2
LOCATION
REMARKS
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNITS QUANTITY
202 Removal of Concrete Box Culvert EA 1
203 Muck Excavation CY 107
206 Shoring (Area 2) LS 1
206 Structure Excavation CY 897
206 Filter Material (Class A) CY 134
206 Filter Material (Class B) CY 46
206 Structure Backfill (Class I) CY 239
515 Waterproofing Membrane SY 224
601 Concrete Class D (Box Culvert) CY 174
602 Reinforcing Steel (Epoxy Coated) LB 65,291
604 Manhole Ring and Cover EA 2
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
City of
Engineering
fcgov.com/engineering
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
TRANSPORTATION
717 Seventeenth Street, Suite 2600, Denver, CO 80202
T 303.228.3000 F 303.228.3001
BEGIN CURB & GUTTER AND
SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION 174.54
STA. 24+74.54
END CURB & GUTTER AND
SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION
STA. 38+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, END PROJECT
SHERWOOD STREET
STA. 44+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, BEGIN PROJECT
STA. 45+50.00
PROJECT APPROACH, END PROJECT
TOTAL 474.54 0
SUMMARY OF PROJECT LENGTH FEET MILES
ROADWAY 474.54 0.090
MAJOR STRUCTURE 0 0.000
PROJECT GROSS LENGTH 474.54 0.090
TABULATION OF LENGTH & DESIGN DATA
STATION
FEET
MAJOR
STR.
ROADWAY
DESIGN DATA MYRTLE
MINIMUM RADIUS OF CURVE 275 FT
MAXIMUM GRADE 8.00%
MINIMUM S.S.D. HORIZONTAL 200 FT
MINIMUM S.S.D. VERTICAL 200 FT
MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED 25 MPH
2032 DESIGN TRAFFIC N/A
CLEAR ZONE DISTANCE (TANGENT) 2 FT
20 of 64 STRUCTURE GENERAL INFORMATION
21 of 64 STRUCTURE LAYOUT
22 of 64 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS
23 of 64 STRUCTURAL TRANSITION DETAILS
24 of 64 STRUCTURAL TRANSITION DETAILS
25 of 64 STRUCTURE TROLLEY DETAILS
26 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN TABULATION AND NOTES
27 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
28 of 64 POTHOLE DATA
23 of 64 STRUCTURAL TRANSITION DETAILS
24 of 64 STRUCTURAL TRANSITION DETAILS
25 of 64 STRUCTURE TROLLEY DETAILS
26 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN TABULATION AND NOTES
27 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
28 of 64 POTHOLE DATA
MYRTLE STREET
SHEET NO. OF TITLE
29 of 64 TITLE SHEET
30 of 64 STANDARD PLANS LIST
31 of 64 GENERAL NOTES
32 of 64 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
33 of 64 SUMMARY OF APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES
34 of 64 TYPICAL SECTIONS
35 of 64 TABULATION OF REMOVALS
36 of 64 TABULATION OF ROADWAY
37 of 64 TABULATION OF UTILITIES
38 of 64 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
39 of 64 REMOVAL AND RESET PLAN
40 of 64 ROADWAY PLAN
41 of 64 ROADWAY PLAN
42 of 64 ROADWAY PROFILE
43 of 64 ROADWAY PROFILE
44 of 64 GUTTER PROFILES
45 of 64 GUTTER PROFILES
46 of 64 GRADING PLAN
47 of 64 GRADING PLAN
48 of 64 STORM INLET RECONSTRUCTION DETAILS
49 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
50 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
51 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
52 of 64 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN NOTES
53 of 64 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
54 of 64 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
55 of 64 STRUCTURE GENERAL INFORMATION
56 of 64 STRUCTURE LAYOUT
57 of 64 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS
58 of 64 STRUCTURAL TRANSITION DETAILS
59 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN TABULATION AND NOTES
60 of 64 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
61 of 64 POTHOLE DATA
62 of 64 WATER UTILITIES: DRAWING INDEX, NOTES, AND ABBREV.
63 of 64 WATER UTILITIES: WATER MAIN REHABILITATION
64 of 64 WATER UTILITIES: WATER DETAILS
MYRTLE STREET
STA. 19+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, BEGIN PROJECT
STA. 20+00.00
BEGIN ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
300.00
STA. 23+00.00
END ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION
STA. 23+00.00
BEGIN CURB & GUTTER AND
SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION 174.54
STA. 24+74.54
END CURB & GUTTER AND
SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION
STA. 38+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, END PROJECT
SHERWOOD STREET
STA. 44+00.00
PROJECT APPROACH, BEGIN PROJECT
STA. 45+50.00
PROJECT APPROACH, END PROJECT
TOTAL 474.54 0
SUMMARY OF PROJECT LENGTH FEET MILES
ROADWAY 474.54 0.090
MAJOR STRUCTURE 0 0.000
PROJECT GROSS LENGTH 474.54 0.090
TABULATION OF LENGTH & DESIGN DATA
STATION
FEET
MAJOR
STR.
ROADWAY
AD SET
5 White only.
♦ New signs and devices shall be manufactured with Type IV sheeting. Existing signs and devices manufactured with Type III sheeting
may be used on projects advertised prior to January 1, 2014. Signs and devices used on projects advertised on or after January 1, 2014
shall be manufactured with Type IV sheeting.
No. 357 or No. 467 coarse aggregate by weight of total aggregate. If all transverse joints are doweled,
the concrete mix shall consist of a minimum 55 percent AASHTO M 43 sizes No. 57, No. 6, No. 67, No.
357, or No. 467 coarse aggregate by weight of total aggregate.
UP = UPHMA
– Pn3
)
HRI I = - $1.28
(c) Corrective Work.
The Department will analyze the SA testing for acceptance and indicate areas requiring corrective work in
accordance with subsection 105.07(b). Corrective work shall be proposed in writing by the Contractor.
Corrective work shall not be performed until approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not
perform any corrective work on the final layer until after the Engineer returns the results of the Initial
Smoothness Acceptance testing and after the Department’s Smoothness Verification testing, if performed.
The Contractor shall perform corrective work in the areas indicated by the SA testing.
Corrective work on lower layers shall be at the Contractor’s discretion.
The Contractor shall profile the roadway to verify the required corrective work has been completed.
If the Contractor elects to perform corrective work prior to the completion of initial SA testing, the entire 0.10
mile section, or fraction thereof, will not be eligible for incentive payment, but will be eligible for disincentive.
The Engineer will not modify the limits of the 0.10 mile sections to group corrective work areas in an effort to
reduce the number of sections impacted by this decision.
The Contractor may elect to perform additional corrective work to reduce or eliminate the disincentive
payment for each 0.1 mile section or fraction thereof after the initial SA testing and the Department’s
verification testing.
619 COPPER PIPE LF
75
$ ‐
619 PLUG EXISTING 4 INCH PIPE LS
1
$ ‐
515 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SY
531
$ ‐
601 CONCRETE CLASS DCY
414
$ ‐
602 REINFORCING STEEL (EPOXY COATED) LB
152947
$ ‐
$ ‐
206 SHORING (AREA 2) LS
1
$ ‐
206 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION CY
2118
$ ‐
206 FILTER MATERIAL (CLASS A) CY
317
$ ‐